-

EMULATION -WORKING
EXPLAINED
Practical Handbook for the Guidance of Officers, from Me
Master to the Outer Guard, in Craft Lodges under Me
jurisdiction of the United Grand Lodge of England

KENT
! "#$ % & ' ( ! )*++
! , - ! ! , ! - . ! - (
"/0)$ ! - .(-!'(1 ! )*0)$
!23!' (-'. ! )454$
6 % ' 3! &'.7( 8.99!7
& .:-!' /*"0$ 6 ' (
& .:-!' )*++

! 23 ! ' , - ! & 2 2 -- !! , - ! 2 ; 9. - ! ,
2:' <!2! - =. ;.'7 *#/> .' *#/#

'! !:- ' ';( ! , (-'; -

'! !:- ' (-'. *#/ *#/" !:;-7

'! !:- ' !-!' 9?!( *#*0 *#/+ !:;-7
'! !:- ' - ' ! *#*4 *#/5
(Twelfth Edition)

A. LEWIS (MASONIC PUBLISHERS) LTD.

6 & & S.W.5

0968
All rights reserved.
 First published in November 1929
Second and revised edition, September 1932
Third August 1935
Fourth October 1937
Fifth December 1939
Sixth , July 1942
Seventh December 1944
Eight h March 1946
Ninth August 1948
Tenth December 1953
Eleventh September 1960
Twelfth November x 968

Printed in Great Britain

 ! .-! - ;'.39!
! & &
@ ! '!.9 (! , ' - ! , '(- - 2! A .- A '
. !(-;'! :!',! - ' -;.9 ;9 3! 3' ; -
- 2!. @

In the Interests of the Brethren.

CHAPTER PACE
& 5
FOREWORD II
AUTHOR'S PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION 13
AUTHOR'S PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION 19
P A R T I
(Some Facts about Emulation)
WHAT IS EMULATION ? . 23
EMULATION AND THE GRAND STEWARDS 37
THE EMULATION LECTURES 53
THE EMULATION MATCH-BOX 6o
THE EMULATION COMMITTEE . 65
SQUARING THE LODGE 67
SOME DIFFERENCES OF WORKING 70
PART II
(The Officers of the Lodge and their Duties)
THE OFFICERS OF THE LODGE 79
THE TYLER . 81
THE STEWARD 87
THE INNER GUARD 90
THE ASSISTANT SECRETARY 105
THE ORGANIST . 108
THE ALMONER . 111
THE ASSISTANT DIRECTOR OF CEREMONIES 114
THE DEACONS . 117
XVI . THE JUNIOR DEACON 124
XVII . THE SENIOR DEACON 136
THE DIRECTOR OF CEREMONIES . 149
THE SECRETARY 170
THE TREASURER 178
XXI . THE CHAPLAIN. 181
XXII . THE WARDENS . 185
X X I I I . THE JUNIOR WARDEN 192
XXIV. THE SENIOR WARDEN. 198
XX V . THE IMMEDIATE PAST MASTER . 205
XXVI . THE WORSHIPFUL MASTER 211
XXVII . THE WORSHIPFUL MASTER (contd.) 227
PART III
(Miscellaneous Matters)
THE LODGE OF INSTRUCTION 249
SMOKING AT REFRESHMENT 263
MASONIC DON'TS . 269
APPENDIX A (List of Recognised Lodges of Instruction) 277
APPENDIX B (Table of Knocks) . 279
APPENDIX C (Letter from V.W. Bro.
Sir Edward Letchworth, G.S.) 280
G E N E R A L INDEX 283
 8 JOSEPH JOHNSON,
P .A , G. CHAPLAIN.
( with very real pleasure that I write a foreword
to this b o o k. T he autho r , W . B ro . Herb er t F.
Inman, L.R., has been known to me in Masonic
circles for a number of years, and a more earnest
and capable Brother I have not met. From the com-
mencement of his Masonic career he has been eager
to acquire knowledge of Freemasonry and has
earnestly studied differing Rituals, with the re-
sult that he is a convinced adherent to Emulation and
is acknowledged as a most capable exponent.
This book is a Manual of Instruction and Guidance for
Masons, and is written by a worker for workers in
strict accordance with the recognised system of t h e
E m u l a t i o n L o d g e o f I m p r o v e m e n t . T h e su-
preme motive of Bro. Inman in writing this book has
been to stimulate Brethren to become proficient in
working the different Ceremonies of the Craft.
Like all who take Masonry seriously, he has a great
abhorrence of inefficiency and slovenliness in work-
ing t he Cr aft r it ual. He ad vo cates that in the
wo r ki ng o f Lo d ge Cer e mo nies t her e shall b e
*/

complete mastery of the Ritual, with accuracy in

every detail of procedure.
T he author knows from long experience the
deplorable ignorance of correct procedure which is
often manifested, and how many Brethren suffer
through lack of competent tuition. The result is
that Candidates are not impressed with the Lodge
Ceremonies as they should be, and as they would be
if the Ceremonies were carried through with ease
and dignity.
This book provides ample explanation and reliable
guidance for all Brethren who desire adequate
equipment for their duties, whatever their nature or
degree. The author has had long experience as a
Preceptor of several Lodges of Instruction, and is rec-
ognised as an expert Instructor in Emulation-
working.
I have read the proofs of this book with intense
pleasure and unhesitatingly commend it to my
Brethren who, in this and other lands, are wishful
for trustworthy guidance in their effort to acquire effi-
ciency in the work of Craft Lodges.
 1 &

@ The Master-Elect has offered me a collar; I must

begin to look up the A '? @
How often we hear some similar remark from the
young Mason who is soon to place his foot upon one
of the lower rungs of the ladder of Masonic pro-
gress! He is about to be entrusted with a position
of the utmost importance and responsibilityfor
all Masonic Offices may be so describedand he
therefore decides that it is high time he began to
seek that knowledge which he should long since
have acquired.
It is not difficult - imagine the disastrous con-
sequences which would certainly ensue in the outer
world of business life for the man who deferred
preparation for the responsibilities of a higher post
in the sphere of his particular daily avocation until
a fter his preferment. Yet, in Masonry, procras-
tination and indifference are all too frequently in
evidence.
*"

In the Fourth of the Antient Charges we are told : "All

preferment among Masons is grounded upon real worth
and personal merit only. . . . Therefore no Master
or Warden is chosen by seniority, but for his merit."
An admirable counsel of perfection, but one which, it
is to be feared, has for many years been honoured more
in the breach than in the observance. All too common
has become the practice of promoting Brethren
according to their position in the Lodge list of
Members, with little or no thought as to their qualifica-
tions, or as to the manner in which they are likely
to discharge the duties appertaining to their Office.
Senior Past Masters cannot be held entirely free
from censure in this connection, for there must be
many who read these words who have known the
youthful and zealous Master-Elect who, desirous
of appointing as his Officers the most capable of his
Brethren, has allowed himself to be influenced by
the solemn warnings of his seniors against "causing a
split in the Lodge," "disturbing the harmony," and
so on ad infinitum.
Harmony and Fraternity, of course, must not be
lightly disturbed, but the impressive dignity and
solemn beauty of our Ceremonies and Rites are of
equal importance, and these desirable effects are to
be obtained only when the Master and his Officers
are efficient in every detail of their manifold re-
sponsibilities.
 1 & *+

A Lodge of Freemasons is "an assemblage of

Brethren met to expatiate on the mysteries of the
Craft," as we are reminded in the opening Section
of the First Lecture. Let the framework of that
Lodge be insecure in any of its parts and the entire
structure must suffer, with consequent confusion
and undignified blundering during those grave pro-
ceedings which should at all times be characterised
by ennobling dignity, awe-inspiring solemnity, and
perfect smoothness of execution.
" All preferment among Masons is grounded upon real
worth and personal merit only."
Much remains to be done before this counsel of per-
fection becomes the universal rule. But much has
already been done, and there are to-day welcome indi-
cations that Masters-Elect and Lodge Com-
mittees are paying more careful consideration to the
qualifications of prospective Officers. Also, with
the continued and rapid growth in the number of
reliable Lodges of Instruction, there is to be found
among the younger members of the Fraternity a
healthy spirit of inquiry and a desire for knowledge,
combined with an increasing and laudable deter-
mination to become proficient in their various
duties.
It would scarcely be possible to pay too high a
tribute to the valuable work done in our Lodges of In-
struction *; but, with it all, Preceptors are busy
B !! : /00 , ' 9 (- , '! (! 2;9.- A '? !(
, (-'; -
*>*>

men, and the time at their disposal at the weekly

meetings is u s ually limited to about an hour and a
half. Therefore it may well happen that even the
diligent young Mason who attends his Lodge of In-
struction with fair regularity may still be left in
doubt on many points in connection with his duties,
quite apart from the words and phrases which he
seeks to memorise within the peaceful seclusion
of his abiding-place.
It is for such of our younger Brethren that this
little Manual has been compiled, in the earnest hope
that they may find it of some practical assistance.
It has been written in no dictatorial spirit, but with
one desire only, to aid the newly invested Officer
in his search for that knowledge with which he must
be armed if he is to reflect honour on the choice of
the Worshipful Brother who has given him his
preferment. It is to be hoped that the suggestions
and guiding hints contained herein will be accepted
in the same fraternal spirit in which they are freely of-
fered. The author certainly has no desire arro-
gantly to assume that, because he believes a certain
method to be desirable, therefore all others must of
necessity be wrong.
In all save essentials our Craft Ceremonies vary con-
siderably in the many different systems of Ritual now
to be witnessed during one's Masonic travels, and it
will readily be understood that, within the scope
of so small a work, it has been found advisable to
limit specific directions to one popular and
well-known form of working. The author, having
served a lengthy period of apprenticeship as Pre-
ceptor in various Lodges of Instruction working
under the official aegis of the Emulation Lodge of Im-
provement, prior to his election to the governing
body of that famous School of Masonic Ritual, may
perhaps lay humble claim to speak with so me
authority in relation thereto.
It is to be understood, therefore, that in all cases
where definite directions are given with regard to the
duties of any Officer within the Lodge the Emulation
system is referred to. Such directions may be relied
upon as being accurate in every detail, although,
be it noted, they are given solely on the author's
personal authority, and are in no sense to be accepted
as official pronouncements from the Committee of
E mulatio n Lod ge o f I mpr o vement. E mulatio n
Lodge of Improvement is governed to-day, as it has
always been governed during the hundred odd years
of its existence, by a Committee of expert Past
Masters; any authoritative ruling from that Com-
mittee is only to be obtained through the Secretary,
in his official capacity as such.
The amount of labour involved in the prepara-
tion of this Handbook has been greater than may be
apparent at a casual glance. Limitations of space
demanded drastic restrictions, and not the least diffi-
cult part of the task has been to judge that which
should be omitted rather than that which should be writ-
ten. This Manual, of course, is not intended in
*4

any sense to take the place of the printed Ritual ; it

should be read in conjunction with that Ritual.*
In the hope that his efforts have not been alto-
gether unsuccessful, the author now offers them with
his fraternal greetings to his Brethren in the Ancient
and Honourable Institution which rests upon the
sure foundation of the practice of every Moral and
Social Virtue. H. F. I.
November, *#/#
B :' -! <!'( , - ! &!'!2 !( ' ! -;'!( .(
!<!' '! ! <! - ! ,, .9 (. - ' .::' <.9 , - ! & 22 --!! ,
- ! 2;9.- ! , 2:' <!2! - !<!'- !9!(( - ! (:;-
.39! ,. - '!2. ( - .- - ! A '?!'( .- 2;9.- . .- - ! '!
(! !( , (-'; - A! - ! ' :' , ! 7 <!'7 9.' !97
- - ! :' -! ' -;.9 9!.' - ! &!'!2 !( 2!'!97 37 9 (-!
- - !2 A ;9 3< ;(97 -.?! 2. 7 7!.'( . ,!A '!- '!
A ;9 !<!' .--. - . 7- .::' . - .- (-. .' ,
A ' . ;'. 7 A (- ; ( !( - ! A '? , - ! 2.C ' -7 ,
?!! 2;9.- A '?!'(
- ;- , ' . 2 2! - D;!(- - ! A ( 2 , - ! .-
- -; ! . :-! 37 - ! 2;9.- & 22 --!! - A.' ( :' -! 3 ?(
, ' -;.9 7!- - ! !E (-! ! . ;(!,;9 !(( , (; ' -;.9( . -
3! '! 7 9. 2 - .- - ! 2;9.- &!'!2 !( .'! 9!.' -
!:! ! -97 , - ! .(( (-. ! , - ! :' -! ' -;.9 A 99 - 3!.'
- ! -!(- , !E.2 .- ! :.'- ;9.' ' -;.9 .( 3!! ;(!
- ! :.(- . ( ;(! - .7 37 :'. - .997 .99 - ! '! !:
- '( , - ! '! (! !( , (-'; - . - !(!
9!.' ! '!- '! A (!97 '! 22! - - - ! ' :;: 9( (
(.2! ' -;.9 A A.( , '(- ((;! 2 '! - . (!<! -7 7!.'(
. .( 3!! , .9 ;9.39! 3! !, - - 2. 7 - ;(. ( , 2;9.
- A '?!'( .99 :.'-( , - ! A '9
! ' - ;.9 ' !, !''! - ( The Perf ec t C ere mo ni es of Cr af t
Masonry F:;39 ( ! 37 !(('( !A ( > .'- 9. !
+G '! ! -97 '!< (! ; !' - ! :!'( .9 (;:!'<
( , - ! '! !:- ' , ! , - ! 9!. '! (! !( ,
(-'; - ! :'!(! - A' -!' ; !( -.- 97 '! 22! ( - ( ' -
;.9 - .99 (-; ! -( !( ' ;( , .--. :!',! - - ! 2;9.-
&!'!2 !( H
 introducing the Second Edition of this Manual
the author's first duty is a happy oneto express
sincere thanks to his Brethren, not only in London
and the Provinces, but also in several of the distant
Districts over the seas, for the many fraternal and en-
couraging congratulations he has received in commu-
nications expressing appreciation of the First
Edition.
Many correspondents have been good enough
to o ffer suggestio ns for add itio nal matter fo r
incorporation in future editions. Limitations of
space alone preclude the adoption of more than a
small number of these welcome suggestions.
There has been a widespread desire for more
detailed information relating to matters connected
with the Emulation Lodge of Improvement (apart
from the actual Ritual and Ceremonial) and perhaps
the additional chapters now included in Part I of
the Second Edition will meet this request.
In Part II the detailed instructions tendered for
the guidance of Lodge Officers have been amplified
in many directions, and the author offers this
/5

Second Edition of the Manual to his Brethren in

the hope that it may meet with a reception at least
as gratifying as that accorded to the First Edition.

September *#)/
 *
&

&
I

the experienced Emulation enthusiast who

spends, perhaps, two or three evenings a week in a rec-
ognised Lodge of Instruction, and who rarely
misses a meeting of - ! 2;9.- ! , Im-
provement .- '!!2.( (1 .99 - ! D;!'7 .- - !
head of this chapter will, no doubt, appear super-
fluous. Those zealous and industrious ritualists,
however, must remember that there are very many
Brethren who have never entered the famous Lodge
of Improvement, Brethren whoeven though they
may claim to be Emulation-workerspossess no
more intimate knowledge of Emulation than is to
be derived from a study of the printed ritual under
the supervision of a Preceptor who, in many cases,
may be as uninformed on the subject as the pupils
who look to him for tuition.
For the information of such Brethren an attempt
will be made to answer the query which heads this chap-
ter. The answer must of necessity be brief, the
primary object of this Manual being to provide
practical hints for those Brethren who seek to
perfect themselves in the Emulation Ceremonies,
rather than to offer anything in the nature of a
critical survey of the history of the Emulation Lodge
of Improvement.
It cannot be gainsaid that the youthful Masonic
student, eager for kno wledge, is frequently be-
wildered by the multiplicity of Masonic rituals
which are brought to his notice. He hears about
Logic," West End,' Oxford," Bristol," Uni-
versal,' 'North London,' and many other so-called
Masonic workings.' No doubt he wonders what
they all meanwhy there are so manywhence
they came. Possibly, too, being unlearned in the
history of Masonic ritual, he mentally brackets
Emulation with the rest, regarding it as no more
than a fanciful name created by some imaginative
Brother in search of a novelty.
Very briefly, it may be explained that 'Emula-
tion 'the bare word itselfis an abbreviated form
of describing the Emulation Lodge of Improvement
for Master Masons, meeting at Freemasons' Hall,
Great Queen Street, London, W.C.2, on Friday
evenings at six o'clock, and that it is also the word
used to describe the particular system of ritual
taught therein.
The Lodge of Improvement was founded in 1823,
its object being to teach the precise form of ritual
settled by the Lodge of Reconciliation, as approved,
sanctioned, and confirmed by the United Grand
 I /+

Lodge of England on 5th June 1816, which sanction

was duly recorded in the Minutes of Grand Lodge
for that date.* The basic principle of Emulation is
that none has the right to alter that ritual in word or
action until such timeif everas the Grand
Lodge may officially sanction such alteration. The
claim repeatedly advanced by many eminent sup-
porters of the famous Lodge of Improvement is that
Emulation teaches to-dayand has always taught
that particular, authorised ritual without variation.
How far can such a claim be substantiated to-day ? Any
answer to this query demands some reference to the
condition of affairs existing in English Craft Ma-
sonry during the early part of the nineteenth cen-
tury, but such reference must necessarily be brief
when the subject has to be disposed of within the
scope of a single chapter Suffice it to say that prior
to the year 1813 there existed two Grand
Lodges,one established in 1717, afterwards known
as the Moderns; and the other founded in 1751,
generally referred to as the Ancients. For more
than sixty years bitter rivalry existed between the
two bodies, but in 1813 a Union was happily con-
summated. Hence the present title of the United
Gr a nd Lo d g e o f E n g la n d . T he se fa ct s a r e, o f
course, familiar to all experienced students, but we
are here writing for the novice.
B !! ::! E & : /4*
'!- '! !( ' ;( , 2 '! 2:9!-! , '2.- A 99 , 2. 7
-!'!(- !-. 9( . 9!'1( History of the Emulation Lodge of
Improvement.
/>

I t is readily to be understood that the lo ng-

standing rivalry was not terminated without con-
siderable difficulty; new regulations were essential
for the government of the Craft, and the settlement of
the form of ritual to be used under the newly
formed Grand Lodge was, quite naturally, one of
the controversial questions which gave rise to much
discussion and difference of opinion.
The Articles of Union, ratified, confirmed, and
sealed on 1st December 1813, stipulated that there
should henceforth be perfect unity of working. For
the purpose of establishing such unity of working
the Articles further provided for the constitution of a
Lodge to be styled the Lodge of Reconciliation,
such Lodge to be composed of an equal number of
expert Masons from each of the old Constitutions. In
Article V we find that the Brethren composing the
Lodge of Reconciliation were empowered to settle the
form of ritual to be observed for all time.
That the Brethren of the Lodge of Reconciliation
spared no efforts to arrive at unanimous and satis-
factory conclusions is proved by the fact that it was
not until 20th May 1816 that the Ceremonies decided
upon were rehearsed before an especial meeting of
the Grand Lodge, at which the M.W. the Grand
Master, H.R.H. the Duke of Sussex, presided. At
the next meeting of the Grand Lodge, held on 5th
June 1816, the Ceremonies recommended were
approved and confirmed.
It is seen, therefore, that in the year 1816 a par
 I /0

ticular method of opening and closing the Lodge

in the Three Degrees, and of Making, Passing, and Rais-
ing Masons was approved and accepted by the United
Grand Lodge on behalf of the whole of the English
Fraternity. The Installation Ceremony was dealt with
at a later date when, in, 1827, the Grand Master, through
a Board of Installed Masters, held four meetings and
decided the only form of Installation Ceremony
which has ever received the seal of authority.
The Lodge of Reconciliation, having fulfilled the spe-
cific purpose for which it was warranted, ceased to
exist in 1816, and the propagation of the newly arranged
Reconciliation Ritual devolved upon the Lodges of
Instruction which came into being at that period. Of
those Lodges one of the most prominent was the
United Lodge of Perseverance, founded on 26th
January 1818, a little more than a year after the
dissolution of the Lodge of Reconciliation. This
Lodge numbered amongst its members several of the
most learned Masons of the day, of whom nine became
Founders of the Emulation Lodge of Improvement in
1823. Others subsequently joined the Lodge of
Improvement. At one of their meetings the Breth-
ren of the United Lodge of Perseverance passed the
following resolution :
" That the Ancient Lectures and the Ceremonies
of Initiating, Passing, and Raising, as confirmed by
the Grand Lodge of England, be strictly adhered to
in this Lodge."
/4

The Lodge of Reconciliation, as already stated, dis-

solved in 1816, and the Emulation Lodge of Improve-
ment was not founded until 1823. But this gap of
seven years is reduced very considerably when it is
found from reliable evidence that the Emulation
Lodge of Improvement obviously emanated from the
old United Lodge of, Perseverance. The majority of
the Brethren from the latter Lodge became enthusiastic
supporters of Emulation, and it is reasonable to assume
that the resolute old Masonic veterans who passed the
resolution quoted above would not have permitted
the slightest innovation in the working of the Rec-
onciliation Ceremonies during their lifetime.
No review of Emulation's history, however brief,
would be complete without reference to the cele-
brated Peter William Gilkes, a famous Masonic
instructor whose name is inseparably bound up with
E mulatio n's early activities. Writing of Peter
Gilkes, the late Bro. Henry Sadler, Grand Librarian, a
noted Masonic historian and author, said :
" Indeed we question whether any single indi-
vidual, either before his time or since, has attained to
such distinction as a Masonic instructor."
On 6th August 1818, V.W. Bro. Edwards Harper,
Grand Secretary, wrote to the W.M. of Lodge 498,
Shrewsbury :
" In referring you to Peter Gilkes I mentioned
that he would instruct you in the correct method
adopted since the Union."
 WHAT IS EMULATION ? 29

O n 6 t h S e p t e mb e r 1 8 4 3 , V . W . B r o . W . H .
White, Grand Secretary, wrote to the W.M. of
Lodge 523:
" Bro. Gilkes was fully master of all the Ceremonies,
and I believe he most faithfully observed them."
Bro. Peter Gilkes was born in 1765 and died in
1833. He was Initiated in 1786 in the British Lodge, now
No. 8, the Lodge which gave its sanction to the United
Lodge of Perseverance, of which Lodge Gilkes
was a 'prominent member. Peter Gilkes was pre-
sent at the first meeting of the Emulation Lo d ge
o f I mp ro vement; he b ecame a memb er shortly
afterwards and was Leader of the Committee in 1825.
It is worthy of note that Gilkes was an attendant
at the meetings of the Lodge of Promulgation, a
Lodge constituted in 1809 by the Grand Lodge of
the Moderns, its object being 'the Ascertaining and
Promulgating of the Ancient Landmarks of the
Craft.' Put into plain words, this simply means
that the members of the Lodge of Promulgation met
to decide which of their own customs and practices
they must insist upon when the hoped-for Union
came about, and how far they would be prepared to
give way to the Ancients.
A careful study of ancient Records and Minutes
leads one to the conclusion that the majority of the
changes which were ultimately made were decided
upon in the Lodge of Promulgation between 1809
)5

and 18u , some few years before the Lodge of Recon-

ciliation was constituted. That eminent and re-
spected Masonic historian, the late Bro. W. B.
Hextall, wrote:
" The Lodge of Reconciliation adopted most of
the decisions at which the Lodge of Promulgation
had not long before arrived."
It is evident, therefore, that Peter Gilkes was in a po-
sition to know beforehand the decisions likely to be
arrived at by the Lodge of Reconciliation, and that
he attended that Lodge (as he did upon ten occa-
sions) not as a pupil, but rather in the capacity of an
expert critic, one who had already memorised f r o m A '
t o Z ' t h e n e w l y a r r a n g e d a l p h a b e t which
others were then striving to learn. Peter Gilkes,
as has been stated, became Leader of Emulation in
1825, which position he held until his death in
1833, when he was succeeded by one of his
pupils, Bro. Stephen Barton Wilson.
The following is an extract from a report of the Emu-
lation Festival held in 1835:
"The meeting was in particular marked by the
presence of the three leading Lecturers on Masonry,
upon whom by general consent as it were the mantle
of Peter Gilkes may be said to have fallen. We
feel an honest pride in our association with Bros.
Dowley, Cooper, and S. B. Wilson, and entertain so
high an opinion of their value to the Society that
we take the liberty of making as public as we can
their well-earned character for intelligence, grounded
 WHAT IS EMULATION ? 31

upon a careful adherence to the Landmarks of the

Order, for the strict observance of our laws and
regulations, and still more for the modesty with
which they received the homage readily offered to
their merits as individuals."
From the fact that the names of Bros. Wilson,
Dowley, and Cooper are mentioned conjointly in the
report as the successors to Peter Gilkes in the govern-
ment of the Emulation Lodge of Improvement, it
seems an obvious deduction that the Lodge was con-
trolled then, as it is to-day, by a Committee of
experienced Preceptors, selected by the members
from amongst the most expert of their number.
It is this joint control by an expert Committee
which is the greatest strength of the Emulation
system ; it affords convincing testimony as to the
accuracy and reliability of Emulation's methods in
the transmission of the authorised Reconciliation
Ritual from those far-off days of the immediate
post-Union period down to the present time. In
the ordinary Lodge of Instruction as Preceptor
succeeds Preceptor there is, of course, a likelihood
one might say a certaintyof innovations creep-
ing into the work. Many of the marked differences in
working now to be seen have come about within
recent years, either through laxity, or as the result of
the personal influence of some strong-willed and imagi-
native members of particular Lodges.
At the Emulation Lodge of Improvement it may
fairly be claimed that anything of the sort is an
)/

impossibility, for the simple reason that there always

isand always has beenan overlapping Com-
mittee, all of one mind, all most solemnly pledged to
observe and insist upon the most minute accuracy, and to
prevent the slightest deviation or innovation. Seated on
the left of Peter Gilkes in his day were Bros. Barton,
Wilson and Dowley. When Wilson succeeded Gilkes
he had with him Bros. Richards and Pike, and,
later, Thomas Fenn, It was Fenn who became
Leader on the death of Wilson in 1866, and he was
sup p o r ted b y B r o s. Richar d s and Murton, and,
subsequently, by Bro. Robert Clay Sudlow. Sud-
low succeeded Fenn in 1883, and he had by his side
for a time Bros. Spaull and Dawson. Then in succes-
sion came Bros. Rushton, Kentish, Lander, and, in
1904, Bro. G. J. V. Rankin, who succeeded Sud-
low as Leader in 1914. On Bro. Rankin's acces-
sion to the Leadership a fourth member was
added to the Committee ; he had the support of
Bros. J. H. Jenks, J. J. Black, and A. Scott. Bro.
Jenks retired in 1916 and was succeeded by Bro. S.
Chalkley, while Bro. S. A. Knaggs took Bro. Scott's
place in 192o. The rulers of Emulation are ever on
the watch to safeguard the transmission of the ritual.
T he work having increased enormously, greater
strain was thrown upon the members of the Commit-
tee; therefore, at the beginning of 1926, it was de-
cided further to enlarge the governing body. The two
Brethren elected were Bros. A. B. Wilson and Her-
bert F. Inman, Bro. Chalkley
 WHAT IS EMULATION ?

resigned towards the end of 1928 and was succeeded

b y Br o. A. J . P eyto n. Bro . I nman resigned in
March 1929, and was succeeded by Bro. H. C.
Tasker, who was elected in January 1930.
The number of members today totals ten and the pre-
sent leader of the Committee is Bro. F. W. R.
Douglas. The Emulation Committee has always
been a strong, unbroken chain from the time of
Peter Gilkes, and innovations, therefore, have been
made as impossible as it is within the power of human
nature to render them. It has to be remembered,
too, that each succeeding member of the Emulation
Committee has been personally instructed and drilled by
his predecessor ; each has to serve a lengthy period of
apprenticeship, generally as the Preceptor of one of
the recognised Lodges of Instruction.
Although the term 'Emulation Committee' * is
generally accepted to refer to those eminent in-
structors who occupy the Committee Bench to take
actual control of the ceremonial work at the weekly
meetings, one must not lose sight of the invaluable ser-
vices rendered to the Lodge of Improvement by the
many distinguished Brethren who have occupied the
positions of Treasurer and Secretary.
Bro. John Hervey, Grand Secretar y, was an
active member of Emulation for nearly forty years,
and held the Treasurership for many years prior
to his death in 1880. He was succeeded by
Bro. Thomas Fenn, P.G.D.., who held the office
See Chapter V.
)"

until 1894. Bro. Sir Edward Letchworth, Grand

Secretary, who had joined Emulation in 1875,
succeeded Bro. Fenn, and officiated as Treasurer
until 1917, when he was followed by Bro. Sir
Colville Smith. This long and close association
between the Lodge of Improvement and Secretaries of
the United Grand Lodge is in itself a convincing guar-
antee of the reliability of Emulation as the rec-
ognised standard of English Craft Ritual.
Emulation's Secretaries have numbered many
zealous and prominent Freemasons. Comparisons
are generally said to be ' odious, ' but it must be
recorded that no Brother can have rendered greater ser-
vice to Emulation in this responsible office than Bro.
J. Ernest Franck, P.A.G.S.Wks., who retired in
January 1931, after holding the position for ten
years. He was succeeded by Bro. S. P. Larkworthy,
L.R., who was unfortunately compelled for private rea-
sons to relinquish the office after only one year's ser-
vice. Bro. Larkworthy was followed by Bro.
Lieut.-Col. G. P. Orde.
Only those who have been intimately associated
with the work of Emulation Lodge of Improvement
can form a fair conception of the vast amount of
arduous labour falling to the lot of the Secretary
and the Assistant Secretary. In the last mentioned
office Bro. Frank W. Simmo nds, P.A.G.Reg.,
officiated for several years from 1925, and was one of
the most popular officials at Headquarters.
On 23rd February 1894, the late Bro. R. Clay
 WHAT IS EMULATION? !
Sud lo w, t hen Lead er o f E mulatio n, mad e the
statement :
"We look upon the trust delivered to us as very impor-
tant indeeda very sacred oneand speaking for
myself, and, am sure, speaking in the name of my
colleagues, I may say that that trust shall be most faith-
fully, most honourably, and most religiously preserved."
T her e ca n b e no d o ub t th at a si mi l ar sp ir i t
animates the members of the Committee of Emula-
tion Lodge of Improvement to-day.
In the course of a speech delivered in 1894 V.W.
Bro. Sir Edward Letchworth, then Grand Secretary,
stated that the records of Grand Lodge conclusively
proved that the Emulation Lodge of Improvement was
looked upon as the standard of Masonic perfection.
Eight years later the same eminent Brother wrote :
"The present working of the Emulation Lodge
of Improvement is generally accepted as the exem-
plification of the Ritual so authorised." *
On 2nd March 1923, the M.W. the Pro Grand
Master, the Rt. Hon. Lord Ampthill, said in the
course of a speech:
"The Emulation Lodge of Improvement has for
one hundred years maintained a uniform standard of
ritual which has remained unaltered."
On 24th February 1928, V. W. Bro. Sir Colville
Smith, then Grand Secretary, stated:
* By Grand Lodge in 1816.
)>

"We have to thank the Emulation Lodge of Im-

provement for maintaining the standard of ritual for up-
wards of a century."
The foregoing brief survey of the history and
objects of the Emulation Lodge of Improvement may be
sufficient to enable the Masonic tyro to answer the
question which heads this chapter. Emulation, he
will see, is something more than the mere name
given to one particular mode of working ; it is the
name of a famous Masonic institution the influence of
which has spread throughout the length and
breadth of the English-speaking Masonic world,
an institution which has, for more than a century,
ever kept before it the sole object of preserving and
transmitting that system of ritual which received, one
hundred and sixteen years ago, the seal of approval
from the United Grand Lodge of England.
 CHAPTER II

many years it has been the customary procedure

for Grand Stewards or Past Grand Stewards to take
active part in the work at the Emulation Festivals.
The programme at these annual demonstrations
usually consists of Lecture-work; the last occasion
when a Ceremony formed part of the programme
was in 1919, all the offices from Master to Inner
Guard being occupied by eminent workers from the
Red Apron Lodges.
This intimate and valued association of the Red
Apron Lodges with the work of Emulation recalls
to mind an interesting parallel between the Emu-
l a t i o n L o d g e o f I mp r o ve me n t a n d t h e G r a n d
Stewards' Lodge. By a very large section of the
Craft, not only in London and the Provinces, but
also in the Overseas Districts, Emulation, as has
already been pointed out, is held to be the reliable
and authoritative standard of English Craft Ritual
and Ceremonial ; and, in consequence, the members
J (- , - ! 2.-!' .9 -. ! - ( .:-!' ( -.?!
,' 2 . .'- 9! 3 7 - ! . ;- ' ! - - 9! @ -!'!( -
.'.99!9 @ :;39 ( ! - ! Masonic Record F !:- H - +#/4G
. '!:' ; ! !'! 37 ;'-!(7 , - ! - ' , - .- C ;' .9
)4

of the gover ning bod y o f E mulatio n Lodge of

I mp r o v e me n t ar e r e gar d ed a s t he her ed it ar y
custodians of the Reconciliation Ritual as it was
settled and officially authorised by the Grand Lodge in
1816. Similarly, historical records indicate that for
some years prior to and after the Union the
Grand Stewards' Lodge was generally looked upon as
the recognised exemplar and guardian of the ac-
cepted ritual. Just as, in the present day, the
Emulation Festival is the outstanding ritual demon-
stration of the year, so, during the decades
immediately following the Union, the public demonstra-
tionsor Public Nights, as they were knownheld by
the Grand Stewards' Lodge, were the pre-eminent
exhibitions of Reconciliation working. The purpose
of those Public Nights during the first part of the
nineteenth century was precisely similar to that of the
Emulation Festivals in the t wentiet h cent ur yto
d isse mi nate fo r the instruction and improvement
of the Craft generally the ancient and authorised ritual.
As is well known to all students of the history of
our Craft Ritual, for some twenty years after the
fusion of the rival Grand Lodges the major part of
the instruction in the newly arranged Reconciliation
Ceremonies was imparted through the medium of
the Masonic Lectures ; rehearsal of Ceremonies was
comparatively rare. Thus, in presenting the annual dem-
onstrations in Lecture-form, the Emulation Lodge
of Improvement is not only following the
 39
practice generally although not invariably
adopted by the Grand Stewards' Lodge in the past, it
is also perpetuating the common practice of all the
ancient Lodges of Instruction which came into be-
ing during the immediate post-Union period, of
wh ic h E mu l at io n Lo d g e o f I mp r o ve me n t a nd
Stability Lodge of Instruction are to-day the lone survi-
vors.
It is on record that, in 183o, Peter Gilkes (then
L e a d e r o f t h e E m u l a t i o n C o m m i t t e e ) , wh e n
addressing a petition to the Grand Master, em-
phasised that the Lectures at the Emulation Lodge
of Improvement were worked ' according to the
c u s t o m o f t h e G r a n d S t e wa r d s ' L o d g e . ' T h e
petition continued :
"We are anxious to promote and diffuse the
genuine principles of the Art in a regular, con-
stitutional manner, and wishing to excite emulation
among the younger Brethren, and to give such
instruction that when they may have the honour to
be appointed to any office, or elected to the chair in a
Regular Lodge, they may be fully competent to
discharge the important duties of the same with that cor-
rectness and regularity which is so essential to the
well ruling and governing of a Lodge."
From the above extract it is obvious (unless we
are to accept the incredible theory that Gilkes
embodied deliberate falsehoods in his petition) that
the Emulation Lodge of Improvement was, at the
period under discussion, giving Masonic instruction
"5

in what was then generally accepted by all loyal

Masons as the regular, constitutional manneri.e. ac-
cording to the system of the Lodge of Reconciliation
thereby preparing its pupils for the correct dis-
charge of their important duties in the various of-
fices of a Regular Lodge.
Some interesting details concerning the Public
Nights held by the Grand Stewards' Lodge are to
be found in the history of that Lodge for the period
from 1735 to 192o, from the pen of that well-known and
reliable Masonic historian, Bro. Albert F. Cal-
vert, P.G.Stwd. Convincing testimony that the
Grand Stewards' Lodgeeven before the final
settlement of the Ritual was arrived atwas loyally ad-
hering to the decisions of the Lodge of Reconciliation is
provided in the following extract from the Minutes
for 21st December 1814:
"The W.M., Wardens and Deacons favoured the
Lodge with the mode of initiating, passing, and
raising Masons according to the plan laid down by the
Lodge of Reconciliation."
No printed or written version of Ceremonies or Lec-
tures has ever been sanctioned or approved by the
Emulation Committee, and an incident referred to by
Bro. Calvert suggests that a similar policy existed
more than a centur y ago in the Grand Stewards'
Lodge, and that a strictly oral method of teaching was
adhered to. Upon the first occasion on which a Lec-
ture was worked in Sections on a
 "*

Public Night (December 1820) it was reported to

the Worshipful Master that a visiting Brother was:
" . . . p u b l i c l y c o m p a r i n g t h e s a m e wi t h a
written book. Whereupon the Master immediately
called the Brother before him and, after demanding
the Manuscript, reprimanded the Brother for his mis-
conduct, and stated his intention of communicating
the circumstances to the Board of General Purposes."
Many convincing indications are provided by
Bro. Calvert that the proceedings at the Grand
Stewards' Lodge were in accordance with the plan
laid down by the Lodge of Reconciliation. From
the Minutes for 18th January 1815 it is seen that
Bro. the Rev. Samuel Hemming (who was Master
of Reconciliation) accepted the Chaplaincy of the
Grand Stewards' Lodge. At this date the members
of the Lodge of Reconciliation were still engaged in
their deliberations concerning the final settlement
of the ritual in accordance with the Articles of
Unio n, and it is a reasonable supposition that
Hemming would not have identified himself so
prominently with the Grand Stewards' Lodge had
he not been convinced that the work there was in
strict accord with that particular system which he
was then assisting to formulate.
At the Centenary Festival of the Grand Stewards'
Lodge, held at Freemasons' Tavern on Wednesday,
9th December 1835, the visiting Brethren included
Bro. W. H. White and Bro. Edwards Harper, the
"/

joint Grand Secretaries at the time of the Union. It

was Bro. Edwards Harper who, in 1818,* wrote to
the Master of Lodge 498:
"In referring you to Bro. Gilkes mentioned he
would instruct you in the correct method adopted
since the Union."
Twenty-five years later (in 1843) Bro. W.
White, Grand Secretary, himself a Past Grand
Steward,T wrote to the Master of Lodge 523:
"Bro. Gilkes was fully Master of all the Cere-
monies."
It seems a logical assumption that these two
Grand Secretaries, who testified to Peter Gilkes' out-
standing ability as an exponent of Reconciliation Ritual,
would not have associated themselves with the
Grand Stewards' Lodge unless well satisfied that
the proceedings therein were in accordance with
the officially authorised system.
Turning to the late Bro. Henry Sadler's History of
the Lodge of Emulation, No. /* we find in the
Minutes, dated 19th June 1821, the following
important entry:
"Bro. J. Deans, Jr., W.M., Bro. J. Robinson,
J.W., and Bro. W. H. White, P.M., having signified
to the Lodge their intention to form a Lodge of
Instruction to be holden at the George and Vulture Tav-
ern, in which Lodge of Instruction the mode of
J !! & .:-!' : /4 K !! & .:-!' : /#
 ")

working is to conform with that of the Grand Stewards'

Lodge, and stating their wish to hold their meetings
under the sanction of this Lodge, it was unanimously re-
solved that per missio n be given for the said
Lodge of Instruction to meet under sanction of this
Lodge during pleasure."
It is worthy of notice that the Bro. White here
mentio ned wa s t he Gr a nd Secr etar y, a nd t hat
Reconciliation working is not referred to. Instead,
the wo r d s used ar e the mo d e o f wo r king is to
conform with that of the Grand Stewards' Lodge.'
Here is cogent evidence that the working of that
famous and representative Lodge was regarded as au-
thoritative by the Grand Secretary himself, and that
such working was in strict compliance with the rulings
of the Lodge of Reconciliation. It will be noted that
the above entry is dated two years before the founda-
tion of the Emulation Lodge of Improvement. There-
fore, Emulation-working could not be stated as
the standard to be adhered to, and we ha ve : ' the
mo d e . . . o f the Gr and Ste war d s ' Lodge.'
If further proof is needed as to the approval of
the proceedings at the Grand Stewards' Lodge by
the Grand Lodge authorities it is supplied under
dates 1837 and 1849. At the Public Night in the
former year Bro. Edwards Harper, Grand Secretary, ex-
pressed on behalf of the visitors their satisfaction at
the proceedings, and associated himself with the
following motion :
44
" T hat co r d ia l t ha n k s ar e d ue to t h e W .M.,
Officers, and other Members of the Grand Stewards'
Lodge for the very able, luminous, and perspicacious
manner with which the Lectures of the 2nd and 3rd De-
grees have now been worked ; thereby affording to
the Brethren instruction and improvement, which when
carried out and followed cannot fail to render the
working of the Craft worthy of deep admiration and
delight."
At the Public Night twelve years later (December
1849) Bro. W. H. White, Grand Secretary, proposed a
vote of thanks :
" . . for the admirable way in which the
Lectures had been worked."
Additional proof that the working of the Grand Stew-
ards' Lodge in the early decades of the nineteenth
century adhered as closely to the plan laid down
by the Lodge of Reconciliation as does the work-
ing of the Emulation Lodge of Improvement to-
day is furnished by the recorded approval of
Bro. Stephen Barton Wilson and Bro. Dr Robert
T . C r u c e f i x . B r o . C r u c e f i x , wh o j o i n e d t h e
Emulation Lodge of Improvement in 183r, and was
one of its warmest supporters until his death in
185o, took a close interest in the work of the Grand
Stewards' Lodge. At the Public Night in March
1847 he proposed a vote of thanks for the gratifica-
tion experienced by the visitors in listening to the
working of the Lecture in the First Degree.
 "+

The Minutes of the Public Night in March 1861

record that a vote of thanks was passed to the
Board of General Purposes:
" . . . for their liberality in granting the use of
the Temple and Organ without the usual payment."
A parallel with this vote is to be found in the
records of the Emulation Lodge of Improvement.
At the meeting of Emulation on 22nd November
1861:
"A letter was read from the Grand Secretary
informing the Lodge that the Board of General
Purposes had granted them the gratuitous use of the
Hall and Temple for the Annual Festival on the
29th inst. A vote of thanks to the Board of General P u r -
p o s e s wa s o r d e r e d to b e r e co r d ed o n t h e Min-
utes."
'In these two entries we have material evidence
that at this period the Grand Lodge authorities
d e e me d t h e G r a n d S t e wa r d s ' L o d g e a n d t h e
Emulation Lodge of Improvement worthy of special con-
sideration in connection with the public demonstrations
which both were giving for the education of the Craft
at large.
At the P ub lic Night o f the Grand Stewar d s'
Lodge held in March 1861, referred to above, Bro.
Stephen Barton Wilson seconded the vote of thanks to
the Officers of the Lodge :
" . . for the ver y excellent and gratifying
manner in which the Lectures had been delivered."
">

It should be noted that, at this period, Bro.

Stephen Barton Wilson had been the Leader of the Emu-
lation Committee for nearly thirty years, and his
unstinted approval must surely be accepted as
weighty testimony to the reliability of the working of
the Grand Stewards' Lodge.
I n Januar y 1 872 the B rethren o f the Grand
Stewards' Lodge donated five guineas to the fund
for the relief of the three daughters of the late Bro.
Stephen Barton Wilson:
" . . . in testimony of the appreciation by the
Lodge of the eminent services rendered to the
Craft by our deceased Brother, as Preceptor for
many years of the Emulation and other Lodges of In-
struction."
Indication as to the of the Grand Stewards'
Lodge, and of the Grand Master's approval of
those objects, is furnished by Bro. Calvert in the
following extracts from a memorial addressed by
the Lodge to H.R.H. the Duke of Sussex in April
1836:
" It must be wholly unnecessary on our part to
trouble your Royal Highness with any observations
on the proceedings which particularly characterise
the Grand Stewards' Lodge, and on the way in
which those proceedings have been conducted.
The importance of the Grand Stewards' Lodge to
keep alive and in due vigour and purity the various
forms and Landmarks established in the Craft, and
which are periodically exhibited and communicated to
 47
the Members of the Order at large on the Public
Nights of the Lodge, we are well assured is duly
felt by your Royal Highness as the Head of the
Craft. . . . Having thus passed a Centenary of its
existence with advantage to the Craft and credit to
its Members, the Master, Wardens, and Brethren of
the Grand Stewards' Lodge are anxious to receive the
expression of your Royal Highness' approvation of
their proceedings, and as a Testimonial that your
Royal Highness is of opinion that the Lodge has
laboured since its institution, and not unsuccessfully, to
maintain the dignity and purity of Freemasonry, and
to disseminate information among the Craft at large."
The reply to the memorial was contained in a
letter to the Master from the Grand Secretary,
conveying the orders of the R.W. Deputy Grand
Master , Lo rd St Jo hn Sp encer Churchill, who
had laid the document before the M.W. Grand
Master. Bro. W. H. White wrote :
"His Lordship directs me to say that His Royal
Highness has been pleased to express himself well satis-
fied of the zeal with which the Members of the Grand
Stewards' Lodge have at all times exerted them-
selves to promote the general interest of the Craft,
and of the manner in which their labours have
been conducted to preserve in due purity the various
forms, ceremonies, and Landmarks of the Order."
In February 1838 the Brethren of the Grand
Stewards' Lodge resolved to apply to the Board of
"4 H

General Purposes to waive the charge of for the

use of the New Temple by the Lodge on its Public
Nights:
. . . o n the gro und that such meetings ar e
held for the purpose of disseminating throughout the
Craft at large the legitimate working of the Lectures,
and not for any exclusive purpose for the Lodge
itself."
In April 1839 a circular signed by the Master and Sec-
retary of the Grand Stewards' Lodge was sent out
to the eighteen Lodges which had the privilege of
sending Grand Stewards annually, and to others,
from which the following is a noteworthy extract :
"On Public Nights in March and December the Lec-
tures as handed down by time-honoured Masons are
delivered in the Temple, and are attended on every
occasion by a large assembly of the Fraternity an as-
sembly increasing on each meetingand the
Members are desirous to impress on the minds of
the Brethren whom they now address that they
consider themselves as Public Stewards for the obser-
vance of the Landmarks of the Order, holding such
duty in trust as representatives of the past, and
always with the hope of handing down the trust
reposed in them to all succeeding Stewards."
The foregoing paragraph provides a striking
parallel with a clause in the speech of the late Bro.
Clay Sudlow at the Emulation Festival in February
1894.* On that occasion Bro. Sudlow said:
B !! & .:-!' : )+
 "#
"We look upon the trust delivered to us as very impor-
tant indeeda very sacred oneand, speaking for my-
self, and, I am sure, speaking in the name of all
my colleagues, I may say that that trust shall be
most faithfully, most honourably, and most re-
ligiously preserved."
That the Brethren of the Grand Stewards' Lodge
spared no efforts to perfect their working at the demon-
strations on the Public Nights is shown by the fact
that in Februar y 1840 the custo m was intro-
duced, after the nomination of the Brethren to
work the Lectures at the next Public Night, of fix-
ing two evenings prior to the Public Night for re-
hearsals of the working. Here we find another
parallel with the custom now in vogue at Emulation,
save that at the Lodge of Improvement the dates
for rehearsal of the Festival work are not fixed in
open Lodge, and that they number far more than
two.
Nine years later, at a special meeting of the
Grand Stewards' Lodge, held in March 1849, the
Brethren expressed the opinion:
"That it is expedient, with a view to improving
the working of the Lectures on the Public Nights,
that at every other meeting some portion, not less
than three Sections, should be worked."
By the middle of the nineteenth centur y the
financial affairs of the Grand Stewards' Lodge were giv-
ing rise to grave concern, and the Minutes for the
meeting in November 185o record that:
+5

"The Secretary stated .. . he had a conversation

with the M.W. Grand Master as to the state of the
Lodge with respect to the number of its Members,
etc., when his Lordship was pleased to express his
desire to see the Lodge renovated."
Bro. Calvert relates that with a view to stimu-
lating the interest of the Fraternity in the working of
the ceremonies it was decided in February 185o to
send out to the Lodges a printed letter, informing
the memb er s that the Gr and Stewar d s' Lod ge
held its Public Nights twice a year:
" . . . for the purpose of giving an opportunity
to the Craft in general, and more particularly to
the younger members, of hearing the Lectures
delivered according to ancient form."
The first and only reference to a Grand Stewards'
Lodge of Instruction is contained in an entry in
the Lodge Minutes, dated 19th March 1890, when a
petition was received from Bro. Gordon Smith,
P.G.Stwd., and others, requesting the Lodge to
grant sanction for a Lodge of Instruction :
"To enable the members of the eighteen Lodges hav-
ing the privilege of nominating Grand Stewards to
work the Ceremonies of the Craft in accordance with
Emulation Working for their mutual instruction and
improvement."
The Secretary reported that he had written to
Bro. Gordon Smith for further particulars and
details, but had received no reply. The W.M. and
 +*

Br ethren ther efo re co nsid ered that the matter

should be left in abeyance.
From the foregoing it is seen that the Grand
Stewards' Lodge, which had worked the Masonic
Lectures at least as far back as the latter part of the eight-
eenth century, continued that practice for the instruction
and improvement of the Craft generally until after
the middle of the nineteenth century, in addition
to demonstrating the ceremonies as laid down by the
Lodge of Reconciliation; furthermore, that their
demonstrations were approved by Hemming,
Crucefix, Harper, White and otherswho were
possessed of first-hand knowledge of the precise forms
and language agreed upon by the Lodge of Reconcilia-
tion.
The intimate and valued association of the Grand
Stewards with the work of Emulation Lodge of Im-
provement, referred to at the commencement of this
chapter, has been maintained for many decades. Among
the distinguished Grand Stewards who have been
prominent members of the Emulation Committee
are Bros. Thomas Fenn, P.G.W., and for t e n
ye a r s P r e s id e n t o f t h e B o ar d o f G e n e r a l Pur-
poses; J. Udall, P.G.D.; F. Hockley ; A. A.
Richards, D.G.D.C.; J. A. Rucker, P.G.D.;
Robert Grey, P.G.W.; F. T. Rushton; Sir Edward Letch-
worth, Grand Secretary; J. Russell, P.G.St.B. ; J. H.
Jenks, P.G.D.; Angus N. Scott, P.A.G.D.C.; and
Samuel Chalkley, P.A.G.D.C.
The late Bro. J. S. Granville Grenfell, for fourteen
52
years Grand Director of Ceremonies, Master of the
Grand Stewards' Lodge in *#/5 was an avowed
supporter of Emulation.
Another prominent Past Master of the Grand
Steward's Lodge who rendered valued support to
Emulation is the Past President of the Board of
General Purposes, Bro. J. Russell McLaren, who
on loth March 1931 gave a demonstration of the In-
stallation Ceremony at the Lodge of Improvement
which was described by expert critics in the Ma-
sonic Press as one of the most scholarly and im-
pressive ceremonies heard at Emulation Head-
quarters for a decade.
The names of other Grand Stewards who have
given active support and encouragement to Emula-
tion Lodge of Improvement would make a lengthy list.
The Public Nights of the Grand Stewards' Lodge
were discontinued (and never resumed) in 1868.
At that period the Emulation Lodge of Improve-
ment had for some forty odd years been carrying on
similar work on parallel lines, its leaders imbued
with the same loyalty to the decisions of the Grand
Lodge, and the same resolve to transmit the ancient
and authorised ritual unaltered from generation to gen-
eration, as had characterised the rulers of the older
body.
There can be little doubt that in the present-day
Festival Meetings of the Emulation Lodge of Im-
provement are to be found an interesting echo of the
old. Public Nights of the Grand Stewards' Lodge.
 CH AP T E R II I

Masonic Lectures have been referred to at

some length in the previous chapter, but the subject
is one of sufficient importance to merit further
attention. An examination of the Minutes of the
Lodge of Promulgation * reveals the following entry un-
der date 13th December 1809:
"Resolved that Deacons (being proved on due exami-
nation to be not only ancient but necessary Offi-
cers) be recommended."
Prior to that time Deacons had not been con-
sidered necessary Officers in Lodges under the
Regular Grand Lod ge, a fact which fur nishes
strong presumptive evidence that the Ceremonies
at that period contained very little work actually of a
ceremonial nature.
The greater part of the work was undoubtedly
done by catechism, or, as it is understood to-day,
through the medium of the Lectures. The actual
Ceremonies were brief. The Ceremony of Initiation
then generally known as the ceremony of Making
B !! & .:-!' : /#
+"

a Masonwas frequently performed in a separate

room, known as the Making Room, after which the
Brethren repaired to the Lodge proper for the
working of the Lectures.
For the working of the Lectures in the eighteenth cen-
tur y the Brethren usually gathered around tres-
tle-tables, enjoying tobacco and liquid refreshment.
Gener ally the Master 's q uestio ns wer e ad -
d r es sed to t he Se nio r W ar d e n. So me we r e oc-
casionally put to the Junior Warden, but these usu-
ally related to the tyling of the Lodge and the examina-
tion and admission of visitors. The Office o f Inner
Guard was then unkno wn, the d uties falling to
the lot of the Junior Warden. Sometimes a circular
method of working the Lectures was adopted and
the questions went round the tables, each Brother
answering in turn. After the different Sections the
Charges were drunk, generally in punch, and vol-
leys were given with firing-glasses. These records
of ancient and interesting customs show that Lec-
ture-working is of great antiquity.
As they are known to-day the Lectures are three
in number, and are divided into fifteen Sections,
seven in the Lecture of the First Degree, five in the Sec-
ond Degree, and three in the Third Degree. The
Sections are all catechetical in form and contain detailed
explanations of the various Ceremonies, combined
with many beautifully expressed symbolical refer-
ences to the higher phases of Masonry and Masonic
thought.
 & 55
The earliest Lectures were apparently arranged
about the second decade of the eighteenth century
b y Br o. Dr James And erso n and Bro . Dr Jo hn
Desaguliers, but soon afterwards a Bro. Martin
Clar e ( after war d s Dep ut y Gr and Master ) wa s
authorised by Grand Lodge to prepare a system
of Lectures 'without infringing on the Ancient
Landmarks.' Some thirty years later, about 1766,
that great and distinguished Mason, Bro. Thomas
Dunckerley, was commissioned to prepare a fresh
set of Lectures.
Still ano ther e mine nt Maso n who p r ep ar ed
Masonic Lectures was Bro. William Hutchinson, s o m e -
t i m e s k n o wn a s ' t h e f a t h e r o f M a s o n i c sym-
bolism.' Hutchinson was resident at Barnard Cas-
tle, Dur ha m, a nd , whi le he wo r ked i n the
North, Bro. William Preston was similarly employed
in the South on a system of Masonic Lectures which
soon superseded all others.
At the time of the Union in 1813 it was resolved to
revise Preston's Lectures, the duty being en-
trusted to Bro. the Rev. Dr Samuel Hemming,
who made several alterations.
In the previous chapter it has been shown that
during the early decades of the nineteenth century
the Grand Stewards' Lodge was the only admitted au-
thority for the working of a recognised system of Lec-
tures ; and ample evidence has been provided in
that chapter , to show the intimate link existing b e -
t we e n t h e G r a n d S te wa r d s ' L o d g e a n d t h e
+>

Emulation Lodge of Improvement. According to

reliable Masonic historians the Lectures worked at
the Grand Stewards' Lodge were William Preston's Lec-
tures (with few, if any, of Hemming's innovations)
as formerly worked by the Lodge of Antiquity, No. 2,
William Preston's favourite Lodge. From the close
bond of association between the Grand Stewar d s'
Lo d ge and the E mulation Lo d ge o f Improvement
it seems a reasonable assumption that these are the Lec-
tures heard at Emulation to-day.
F ur t h er str o n g e vid e nce i n s up p o r t o f t h i s
assumption is to be found from a survey of the
activities of the United Lodge of Perseverance,*
founded in 1818 for the express purpose of teaching
the Ceremonies and Lectures according to the plan
laid down by the Lodge of Reconciliation. As has
been made clear in Chapter I (pp. 27 and 28), there
can be no reasonable doubt that the Emulation
Lodge of Improvement emanated from the United
Lodge of Perseverance ; and it is worthy of emphasis
that the Brethren of the United Lodge of Persever-
ance solemnly p led ged themselves to a str ict
adherence to the Ceremonies as confirmed by the
Grand Lodge of England,' and to the Lectu re s
which they described as Ancient ' in the year 1821. It
may be mentioned in passing that these Lectures bear
strong resemblance to Lectures known to have been
widely used in the eighteenth century.
The system of teaching the principles of Masonry
B !! & .:-!' : /0
 +0

by means of Lecture or catechism was not abandoned

at the time of the Union, and examination of the
Minutes of the Lodge of Reconciliation * reveals
that part of the work in that Lodge was done by
means of the Lectures. A study of the Minutes of
the early Lodges of Instruction formed during the im-
mediate post-Unio n per iod sho ws that their
work was almost entirely confined to the Lectures
fo r so me year s. T h e M i n ut e s o f t h e S tab il it y
Lodge of Instruction (founded in 1817) mention no
wo r k o ther tha n the Lectur es d ur ing t he fir s t
eighteen years of the Lodge's existence. From the
Minutes of the United Lodge of Perseverance it is
found that on one hundred and fifteen occasions out
of one hundred and thirty nothing but Lecture-
work was done. In most of the early Lodges the
work was confined to the First Lecture, which may
be explained by the fact that in those days a large
number of Masons never progressed beyond the
Degree of an Entered Apprentice.
The adherence to Lecture-working in those early
days is easily to be understood when it is remembered
that, save for a small number of eminent Masons of out-
standing ability and powerful memorymen such
as Peter Gilkes (Leader of Emulation Lodge of Im-
provement) and Philip Broadfoot (Leader of the
Stability Lodge of Instruction)there were
probably few Brethren at that time who were able,
q ui c kl y a nd t ho r o u g hl y, to ma st er t h e ne wl y
J !! & .:-!' : L>
+4

arranged Reconciliation Ritual. Doubtless these

eminent instructors found that the surest and most con-
venient method of impressing their teaching on the
minds of their pupils was by means of question and
answer.
It is scarcely possible to say to-day with any
degree of certainty when rehearsal of Ceremonies, as
it is now practised, supplanted the old Lecture-form
of instruction, and when the old Lecturersor Lec-
ture-Masters as they were more generally knowngave
place to the more modern Preceptors ; but, as Lecture-
teaching became rarer, so the old e x p er t Le ct ur e -
Ma ster s g r e w f e wer , a n d t he Lectures were lost in
many directions.
In practically every system of working the Test Ques-
tions put to a Candidate for Passing or Raising are
merely extracts taken fr o m the E mulatio n Lec-
tures. When the Master offers to put other ques-
tions if any Brother so desires, he is assuming that
the Candidate knows the whole of the Lecture. It is
interesting to note, too, that in most other work-
ings the explanations of the Tracing Boards are
merely extracts from the Emulation Lectures
threaded together.
It has been mentioned that in many of the old
Lodges of Instruction the Lecture-teaching was
mainly confined to the First Lecture for many
years. This was not so in the Emulation Lodge of Im-
provement because, that being a Master Masons' Lodge,
it adopted the system of the only other
 & 59
Master Maso ns' Lo d gethe Gr and Ste war d s '
Lodgeand devoted equal or more time to the
Lectures in the Second and Third Degrees. Peter
Gilkes petitioned the Grand Lodge to authorise
and go ver n the Lectur es as they had do ne the
actual Ceremonies, but his effort was, unfortunately, a
failure. Unfortunately, because there can be lit-
tle doubt that many of the changes and elaborations
which have crept into the Masonic Ceremonies have
come about by importations leaking in from old,
unauthorised Lectures.
It is because the Emulation Committee realise
the danger of such contamination of the Ceremonies
that they give the same scrupulous attention to the teach-
ing of the Lectures to-day as did their pre-
decessors in the past, and insist that any Brother
elected to the Committee must be an expert Lecture-
Master. T he leakage of Lecture-work into the
Ceremonies has ever been a danger to the purity of
the ancient ritual ; only by constant comparison
and study of the two, Lectures and Ceremonies
together, can the danger be averted. In no other
School of Masonic Instruction is the safeguard so
rigidly maintained as at the Emulation Lodge of Im-
provement.
 CHAPTER IV
&

no feature in connection with Emulation

Lodge of Improvement has been made the subject of
more disparaging criticism than the famous silver
match-box, the award presented by the Committee to
a Brother who succeeds in working any one of the
Ceremo nies at the Lodge of I mprovement with-
out error in either word or action, Both in
speech and in writing, unfriendly critics have
referred glibly to the introduction of a ' pot-hunting spirit'
into the study of Masonic Ritual.
Such criticism can only emanate from those who
are woefully ignorant of their subject and totally unfa-
miliar with the true spirit which influences the great
majority of the regular workers at Emulation Headquar-
ters. The significant fact that Brethren who have
secured the coveted guerdon for perfect rendering of all
the Ceremonies continue to figure among Emulation's
most loyal and regular supporters should afford
convincing proof to all save the most biased of
critics that Emulation's hold upon the enthusiasm
of its adherents is based upon a foundation far more
secure and enduring than
 & 61
any mere thought of securing a tangible reward for
their labours.
A few there may be who are actuated by the desire
to possess a material symbol of their ritualistic
proficiency ; that is, perhaps, inevitable. But an
intimate association with Emulation extending over
many years has convinced the present writer that
the sudden withdrawal of the famous match-box
would lessen Emulation's popularity not a jot, and
that the vast majority of the workers at the Lodge
of Improvement are inspired by genuine interest
in and love for the Masonic Ritual, combined with a
commendable desire to assist, individually and collec-
tively, in preserving and propagating that which
they conscientiously believe to be the Ancient and
authorised form of working as settled by - !
Lodge of Reconciliation. Any spirit of rivalry that
may be engendered at E mulatio n b y the silver
match-box is a spirit of rivalry in its healthiest sense. The
box, when won, is not regarded as a trophy, but rather as
a visible emblem of industry, faith, and perseverance
the outward token of a Brother's belief that a Ma-
sonic Ceremony is a Solemn Rite of such vital impor-
tance as to be worthy of performance with dignified
accuracy and such perfection as humans may hope
to attain.
For seventy-four years the match-box was un-
known at Emulation Lodge of Improvement. Its
creation came about by mere chance. It was in the
autumn of 1897 that . well-known member of
>/

Emulation, Bro. R. L. Badham, worked the Second

Ceremony without correction, an effort which was af-
terwards the subject of comment by the late Bro. R.
Clay Sudlow, Emulation's Leader for thirty
years. Bro. Sudlow's comment was a casual one,
b ut the hap p enin g wa s evid entl y s u fficie ntl y
unusual as to leave an impression on his mind.
Shortly afterwards he asked Bro. Badham's accept-
ance of a little memento of his performance in the
form of a silver match-box. Such was the birth of
what has since become a world-famous Masonic
emblem.
For some years Bro. Sudlow was the personal
donor of the E mulation match-box. At the
Festival held under the Presidency of R.W. Bro.
Sir Augustus Webster, Prov. G.M., Hants and the
Isle of Wight, on 7th March 19o2, Bro. Sudlow
stated in the course of a speech:
" I may say that the apotheosis of an absolutely
correct working of a Ceremony in the Emulation
Lodge of Improvement is a silver match-box, upon
which is recorded the success achieved ; and so
frequently nowadays is that distinction won that
the giver may yet live to find himself in the Bank-
ruptcy Court."
On presentation the Emulation match-box bears
an inscription with the name of the Brother receiv-
ing it, the Ceremony he worked, and the date. A
subsequent success earns a further inscription,
known colloquially among Emulation-workers as a
 & 63
'scratch.' After perfect working of all the Cere-
monies the words Complete Record' are added.
For some eight years after its inception the box
could be won for accurate working of the First
Cer e mo n y wit ho ut the Char ge, o r the Seco nd
Ceremony without the T.B. The Complete Record, how-
ever, could not be obtained until these Cere-
monies had been accurately demonstrated in their
entirety. It was therefore possible for a Complete Re-
cord-holder's box to bear six 'scratches.' Only two
such records were ever completed, one by the late
Bro. J. F. Roberts, P.A.G.D.C., whose matchbox
may be seen in the Grand Lodge Museum.
That the Emulation match-box is no easy prize
may be judged by the number which have been won dur-
ing the seventy-one years which have elapsed since
the award was instituted. Exactly 285 Brethren have
been successful in passing the test; of these, the fol-
lowing 95 Brethren have the distinction of being
Complete Record-holders:
& .'9!( !A ( *#55 -- "
. !' *#55 9!( *#*)
8 &.((.99 *#5) 39! *#*"
99( : *#5" !;2. *#*"
= 3!'-( *#5" '. !99 *#*"
79!( *#5> .2!99( *#*>
!.- *#5> 9( *#*>
1& 9 *#54 . ( *#*0
!.' *#5# & 93! ? *#*0
&' ; *#5# = & !A!99 *#*4
& ( *#*/ = .'9( *#*#
& ;9-L *#*/ & 9. ? *#*#
= = 9. ? *#*/ .E *#/*
!997 -! *#*) !7- *#/*
>"

& .(?!' *#/" !33 *#"*

!: !' *#/" = 2- *#")
= '. ?9 *#/" & - !'( *#""
.'?A '- 7 *#/+ = & !.- !'3.'' A *#">
!'3!'- 2. *#/+ & ' *#">
.': *#/+ ; *#">
!7 9 ( *#/+ & = !22 *#"4
! '2( *#/> 9. ?2 '! *#"#
& = & .:2. *#/0 = &'.A, ' *#"#
.2 9- *#/4 &9;--! *#"#
. .9 *#/4 = '!! *#+5
. !'- *#/4 A. *#+5
.- !9 ' *#/4 9. ?3.99 *#+5
2- *#/4 5 !'7 *#+5
!'' ? *#/# &.9 ;-- *#+*
.9 ( *#)5 99 *#+/
C '2. *#)5 = 29 ( J *#+)
9 , *#)* ;-9!' *#+)
(:!! *#)* ' 2- *#+"
= .-!'( J *#)* = (( -!' *#+"
A!99 *#)/ = !( J *#+"
'! *#)/ - A!99 *#+"
A3 - .2 *#)/ = .'' ( *#+"
= . ! *#)) .< ( *#++
8 !33!' *#)" ';2. *#++
&9.'? *#)" - ?!( *#+>
& !. !' *#)" '.: !99 *#+>
2.( *#)+ & .'9!7 *#+4
& (-!99 *#)> ; *#+4
= -!: ! ( *#)0 & . *#+#
A! *#)4 = ((!E *#>/
& !2.'? J *#)# .2.' ( *#>)
H. H. !9(!7 *#)# = 99 !' *#>0
5 & 9. ! *#"* ;<'7 *#>4
 CHAPTER V
&

a previous chapter it has been shown that from

its foundation in 1823 the Emulation Lodge of Im-
provement has never been under the control of an
individual Preceptor, but has always been ruled by a
Committee of experienced instructors selected by the
general body of members from amongst the mo st
expert o f their numb er. For so me ninety years
the r uling Co mmittee co nsisted o f three trusted
Past Masters, exclusive of the Treasurer and Secretary.
In 1914 a fourth member was added, and the
Committee remained at that strength for twelve
years. In 1926 it was increased to six, and the pre-
sent number of members now stands at ten.
During the one hundred and forty-five years which
have elapsed since the foundation of the Lodge of Im-
provement appointments to the Committee have been
of sufficient rarity to excite widespread interest
throughout the Craft. T his is at once apparent
from a study of the Emulation Minute Books dating
back to 1859. The records prior to that date were unfor-
tunately destroyed, but those available reveal the
interesting information that the majority of the
>>

Brethren elected to the Committee during the last

one hundred and ten years have served thereon for pe-
riods ranging from ten to twenty years. Con-
sequently but few Brethren, however competent they
may be as instructors, can ever hope to receive the dis-
tinction of election to the Committee of the
Emulation Lodge of Improvement.
The fact that the long list of Lodges of Instruction af-
filiated to the Lodge of Improvement includes
Lodges working in Ghana, Rhodesia, South Africa,
Uruguay, Brazil, and Jamaica, affords ample evidence
that the personnel of the Emulation & 22 --!! 2;(-
necessarily be . 2.--!' of considerable importance
among Freemasons, not only in London and the
Provinces, but also to Brethren in far-away Districts
in all parts of the world.
 #
M

adverse criticism most frequently heard con-

cerning Emulation-working is with regard to the
ab sence o f 'sq uar ing' o f the Lo d ge each time
an Officer or Member has to move from one part
of the Lodge to another. One frequently hears
such statements as : " I don't like Emulation, it is
slovenly because they square the Lodge."
Such a criticism can only 3! (. - 3! 3 ' ,
sheer ignorance, but it is noticeable that many of
the most trenchant criticisms of the Emulation
system come from Brethren who have never been
inside the Emulation Lodge of Improvement in
their lives and who are, therefore, scarcely fitted
to assume the role of critics. Careful perusal of
Chapters XVI and XVII, relating to the duties of the
Junior and Senior Deacons, will show that scrupu-
lous attention is given to ' squaring ' the Lodge in
the Emulation Ceremonieson those occasions
when ' squaring ' is necessary.
Fr ee ma so nr y, we ar e t a u g h t, is a 'p e c ul iar
system of morality veiled in allegory and illustrated
by symbols.' The ' squaring ' of the Lodge has
>4

its symbolism during the actual progress of a Cere-

mo n y. At a n ear l y s ta g e o f t he Cer e mo n y o f
Initiation the Master proclaims that the Brethren
from the N., E., S., and W. will take notice that the Can-
didate is about to pass in view before them to show
that he is the Candidate properly prepared, and a fit and
proper person to be made a Mason. The Candidate has,
therefore, to be conducted by the Junior Deacon
via the N. to the E., and thence by wa y o f t he S.
to the W . T her e is her e b o th a symbolical and a
logical reason for 'squaring' the Lodge, and it is so
squared! Similarly at a later stage in the Ceremony
and at certain stages in the subsequent Ceremonies.
At that point in each Ceremony where the Candi-
date is directed by the Master to retire for the
purpose of restoring himself to his p.c.'s there is
no longer any need for 'squaring.' That particular
portion of the Ceremony is then completed, the
Candidate has merely to retire from the Lodge and
there is no reason, either symbolical or logical, why
ceremonial 'squaring' should be indulged in. Nor
does any such reason exist when Brother Secretary
or Bro ther Dir ector o f Ceremo nies may have
occasion to move from one part of the Lodge to
another in the execution of duties quite apart from
the actual Ceremonies.
Generally speaking, it may be laid down that in
the Emulation Ceremonies the Lodge is always
`squared' when the Candidate in charge of the
 M >#

Deacon is actually taking part in a ceremonial or sym-

bolical portion of the work. At other times the
Lodge is not so 'squared,' and those who are so
quick adversely to criticise Emulation-working on
that account may well pause to reflect that, in the
eyes of others, their own perpetual 'squaring' of
the Lodge may perchance appear to be superfluous,
and perhaps a little ridiculous.
The author has to confess that he has not yet been
able to find a Brother who could offer him a logical
and convincing reason for ' squaring ' every time
one moves in Lodge. The custom would appear
to be based on no greater authority or reason than
that which governs the habit of passing the port-
decanter in one particular direction at dinner.
 #

the troubleso me q uestion regarding the

'squaring' of the Lodge, the criticism most fre-
quently advanced against Emulation-working is that it
is `curt' and 'discourteous,' because an Officer is not
taught to show the Sn. on every occasion when h e
is ad d r e s sed b y a se n io r O f fi cer d ur i n g a
Ceremony. In nearly all other modes of working
such is the accepted practice.
It is not the purpose of this chapter to argue the ques-
tion, but rather to offer advice for the guidance of
Brethren who, although desirous of adhering to E mula-
tion procedure, rarely or never attend a recog-
nised Emulation-working Lodge of Instruction,
and are consequently in doubt as to when the Sn.
should be used. Unfortunately their number is
legion, and for such Brethren a simple ' rule-of-
thumb ' direction must be found if possible.
Perhaps the surest guide with regard to the use of
the Sn. in Emulation-working is to remember that
a junior does not show the Sn. when addressed by a
senior, nor when merely replying to a question, but
that he a lways salutes when he himself has cause
to address a senior Officer.
 A simple illustration may be found in the Cere-
mony of Closing the Lodge. The W.M. addresses
the J.W.: 'Bro. J.W., w.i.t.c.c.o.e.M. ?' The J.W.
is being addressed and does not show the Sn. when re-
plying: T.p.t.L.c.t.' He is instructed to direct
that duty to be done and addresses the I.G.: '
Bro. I.G., p.t.L.c.t.' The I.G., being spoken to,
does not salute. The I.G., having discharged his
duty at the door, returns to position, and he now
has to address a senior Officer. He should take the
Sp. and sho w the Sn. T he J.W. in his tur n has
no w to ma k e a r ep o r t t o t he W . M., he h as to
address him, not merely reply to a question. There-
fore, after proper use of his [image], he takes Sp.
and sta nd s to 0 . b e fo r e sp ea k i n g. So t he r u le
is : W hen sp oken to or when mer ely r ep lying
to a q uestio n, no Sn. by the j unior Officer ;
when deliberately addressing a senior, then the Sn. is
used.
T he above direction applies, of course, only
during an actual Ceremony; E mulatio n has no
claims, historical or otherwise, to issue rulings for
the conduct of Brethren outside the actual Cere-
monies. At all other times, when addressed by the
Master, a Brother should show courtesy to the chair
by rising and standing to 0.
A very similar point of difference between Emula-
tion-working and other systems is to be found in the
S.W.'s work. In the majority of systems the S.W.
springs to his feet and shows the Sn. when addressed by
the W.M. during a Ceremony. In
0/

Emulation the S.W. will not go far wrong if he

remembers to remain seated when addressed, but
to stand to 0. when he has to address the Master.
For example, after the W.M. has ' addressed a few ques-
tions to the Can.' at an early stage during the Initiation
Ceremony, he addresses the S.W.: 'Bro. S.W., you
will direct the J.D. to instruct the Can. . . .' The
S.W., being addressed, remains seated. At an ear-
lier point, when the S.W. has to present: 'M r A . B . ,
a C a n . p r o p e r l y p r e p a r e d . . . ' h e stands to 0.
with the Sp: and Sn.
A third point where Emulation differs from the major-
ity of workings, and where Brethren who are infr e-
q uent in their attendance at Lod ge o f I nstruction
are often at fault, ( in connection with the De aco n s '
wo r k. I n mo s t s ys t e ms t he Dea co n shows the Sn.
whenever the Can. does so. In Emulation-working
this is never done. Can there be a more undignified
sight than to see a Deacon waving his wand about
while endeavouring to salute the W .M. 'in p ass-
ing '? E ver y Maso nic sal ute should be given with
smart, military precision, and never with any imple-
ment in the hand.
Deacons who may be uncertain on the point as to
whether they should halt a Can, before directing
him to salute at the W.M. or W.'s pedestals should re-
member that in Emulation-working a salute is
never given 'in passing.' (See footnote on p. 14o.)
In many modes of working it is customary for the
W.M. to give and for all the Brethren to rise
 0)

at the words ' In G.' during the Charge after the

Initiation, a proceeding which probably results in dis-
tracting the Can.'s attention in the middle of a
solemn address to which he should be applying his
mind intently. This interruption of the . Charge
should never occur in an Emulation Ceremony.
Two points in the Third Degree sometimes give
rise to uncertainty in the minds of would-be Emulation-
workers who do not attend their Lodge of Instruc-
tion. The first is as to whether the s...t should be
open or folded during a certain part of the Cere-
mony. The s...t should never be folded. The sec-
ond doubt which frequently arises is with regard
to the correct point for restoring the L.'s. This
should not be done until after the Can. has retired
to restore himself to h.p.c.'s. (See footnote
on .
P 142.)
In some modes of working the W.M. returns a
salute when saluted by an Officer or the Can.,
retaining his seat while he does so. In Emulation-
working the W.M. will not err if he remembers that
the Sn. is never returned. In any case no Masonic
Sn. can correctly be given while seated. In every
Degree a Can. is carefully instructed regarding the posi-
tion in which 'the S.'s of the Deg. are corn.' A Sn.
is a Masonic S.
In the majority of systems the Sn. shown by the Breth-
ren during an Ob. in any Degree is the Sn. of F. In
Emulation (and Stability) the Brethren show the P.
Sn. of the particular Degree in which the
 0+

in conformity with strict Emulation procedure,

but Brethren will be wise to remember that in
Masonry, as in other spheres of life, there is much
wisdom in the ancient fragment of advice: "When
in Rome, do as the Romans do."
However ardent a believer in Emulation practice a
younger Brother may be, he will be ill-advised to en-
deavour to thrust that practice upon his Lodge
when it is obviously unwelcome to the majority of
the Brethren. If his enthusiasm is such that he
cannot bring himself to abide by the avowed and
desired system of the majority of his Brethren, then
his only proper course is to resign and seek member-
ship in more congenial company in an Emulation-
working Lodge.
If it is ' unwise' for an Emulation enthusiast to
endeavour to thrust his favoured system unduly
upon his own Lodge, it is far worse for him to
adopt such an attitude when he is a guest in another
Lodge. Unfortunately it sometimes happens, but
such o ver -zealo us enthusiasts will do well to
remember that such conduct is a disservice to
Emulation, and that Masonic harmony and fraternal
toler atio n ar e o f gr eater value and mo r e vital
importance than conspicuous and sometimes $%&'($ ill-
mannered insistence upon one's own particular
beliefs.
0"

Lodge is working. Certainly it seems incongruous

that the Sn. of F., which belongs to the Second
Degree, should be employed during the First and
Third Degrees. Emulation and Stability, being the
only two systems of working which can advance
definite and reasonable claims to direct descent
fr o m t he au tho r ised wo r kin g o f the Lo d ge o f
Reconciliation, as sanctioned by the United Grand
Lodge in 1816, it would appear to be a reasonable as-
sumption that they are adhering to the ancient and regu-
lar custom in employing the P. Sn. of the Degree
during an Ob.
Dur ing the E xp lanatio n o f the Seco nd T .B .
references are made to the ' middle chamber of the
Temple.' Emulation-workers who aim at word-
perfection are often at a loss to remember the two occa-
sions when the words 'of the Temple' should be
omitted. An infallible ' rule-of-thumb ' is to re-
member that they are omitted when the word '
arrived ' is employed. 'After our ancient Brethren
had entered the porch they arrived . . . which led to
the middle chamber.' `After our ancient Brethren had
gained the summit of the winding staircase they arrived
at the door of the middle chamber.' In these two
instances only, omit the words ' of the Temple.'
Many other cases of difference of working which
give rise to confusion among inexperienced workers
might be cited, but the foregoing are among the
most frequent. The rulings given are, of course,
&
 &

R U LE 1 0 4, Boo k o f Con stitu tio n s, states that the

regular Officers of a Lodge consist of the Master
and his two Wardens, a Treasurer, a Secretary, two
Deacons, an Inner Guard, and a T yler. T he
Master may also appoint a Chaplain, a Director of
Ceremonies, an Assistant Director of Ceremonies,
an Almoner, an Organist, an Assistant Secretary,
and Stewards.
The table of precedence is as follows:
*1.The Worshipful Master.
*2.The Senior Warden. *
3.The Junior Warden.
4.The Chaplain.
*5.The Treasurer.
*6 .T he Secretary.
7.--The Director of Ceremonies.
*8.The Senior Deacon.
*9.The Junior Deacon.
10.The Assistant Director of Ceremonies.
B (! 2.'?! A - . .(-!' (? .'! - ! 1 ! ;9.' 1 '
! !((.'7 ,, !'( , - ! ! A 9! - ! '!2. !' .'! - ! 1
!'2 (( <! 1 ,, !'( A 2 - ! .(-!' 2.7 .:: - , ! (
!( '!(
4
11.The Almoner.
12.The Organist.
13.The Assistant Secretary.
*14.The Inner Guard.
15.The Stewards. *
16.The Tyler.
) (( *++&,+&( +, - "
 CHAPTER VIII

THE TYLER

" To all poor and distressed Masons, wherever dispersed

over the face of earth and water."

So runs the familiar "Tyler's Toast," and it should

b e r eme mb er ed that B r o ther T yler hi msel f is
frequently to some extent a poor and distressed
Brother, perchance a worthy old Past Master who,
having fallen upon hard times, is glad to retain
active association with the Craft, and at the same
time to receive the emoluments of his Office.
"He who is placed on the lowest spoke of Fortune's
wheel is equally entitled to our regard." Such is the
reminder to be found in the Fifth Section of the
First Lecture ; while, in the final Section of the
Third Lecture, it is impressed upon our minds that
"the word Brother among Masons is something more
than a name."
Let us not forget then that, even though Brother
Tyler may be a serving Brother, we meet him on
the Sq uare and part from him on the Level. A
fraternal word of greeting, accompanied by a hand-
shake, will possibly be valued even more than a
piece of silver in the 'plate,' and, if Brother Tyler
4/

has been wisely chosen for his Office, our friendly over-
tures are not likely to be abused.
Brother Tyler may truthfully claim that his Office is
one of antiquity. He was first mentioned in
Grand Lodge Minutes under date 8th June 1732,
and reference to his Office is - be found - ! Consti-
tutions of 17 3 8. He cannot be ' appointed ' by the
Worshipful Master, sharing as he does with
Brother T reasurer the d istinction o f being an
'elected' Officer of the Lodge. Once elected he
may, if he be trustworthy and diligent, confidently
look forward to re-election from year to year, for
there is little likelihood of any Lodge dispensing
with the services of a good Tyler.
That Brother Tyler should be a man of unim-
peachable character, tact, and courteous demeanour is
essential, for not only is he brought into contact with
distinguished Brethren who are visiting the Lodge,
but, by the very nature of his duties, he is the first
Officer of the Lodge to have any ceremonial dealings
with a Candidate seeking admission to our Order.
The ceremony to take place within the Lodge is one
of solemnity and beauty, and it is not to be imagined
that Brother Tyler would indulge in anything in the
nature of jocularity with the Candidate in the prepara-
tion-room.
In some Lodges it is customary for the Worshipful
Master to depute the Director of Ceremonies, or
some other Brother of ability, to assist with the prepara-
tion of the Candidate; but for the purpose
 83
o f this Manual it is assumed that the T yler is
thoroughly competent to superintend such details,
as, indeed, he usually is. Likewise, it is assumed
that he has long since acquired word-perfection in
the phrasing of the reports for the various Degrees.
It is quite likely that our Brother Tyler was well
versed in the mysteries of the Craft before our atten-
tion was first directed to the Three Great Lights.
We assume, therefore, that we are not here writing
for the guidance of a younger Brother, and it is not pro-
posed to discuss the duties of the Tyler's Office in
detail. Suffice it to say that those duties may
truthfully be described as multifarious; the Tyler
who discharges them in a thoroughly conscientious
and efficient manner will earn the lasting gratitude
and goodwill of Brother Secretary and Brother
Director of Ceremonies, who will certainly find
themselves relieved of much anxiety in connection
with minor details.
If there be one direction in which confusion is
apt to arise in relation to the Tyler's duties it is
with respect to the series of reports given upon the
door of the Lodge. If such confusion arises let us
not be too hasty in condemnation of the Brother
who guards the outer porch, for it has to be re-
membered that he serves many Lodges and that
Masonic customs vary in this connection as in others.
We who believe in one particular system should not
be too ready to condemn all others as wrong.
In many Lodges, more particularly in the Pro-
4"

vinces, differentiation is made between a ' Report'

and an 'Alarm,' the former (consisting of the K.'s of
the Degree in which the Lodge is working) being used
for a Member of the Lodge or for a well-known
Visitor, while the latter (consisting of a single K.) is
used in the case of a stranger seeking admission.
There may be much to be said both for and against
the practice, but the fact remains that the single K.
has no Masonic significance. In the Emulation
system of working, with which we are here more
particularly concerned, no such report is countenanced.
Where single K.'s or ' Alarms ' are the practice
this method of report is generally used to announce
the presence of a Candidate for Initiation, but here it
would seem that there is reasonable objection to be ad-
vanced. Ritual may not be binding, but the in-
disputable fact remains that, in the Second Section of
the First of the Ancient Lectures, there is to be
found the statement that the Candidate gains ad-
mission to the Lodge by means of three distinct K.'s,
which K.'s allude to the ancient and venerable exhorta-
tion : "Seek and ye shall find, ask and ye shall have,
knock and it opened unto you."
When a Candidate for Passing awaits admission
the K.'s of the First Degree are given. indicating to
the Brethren within the Lodge that a Brother be-
low the Degree of a F.C. is without. In like
manner when a Candidate for Raising is seeking admis-
sion the K.'s of a F.C. are given to indicate
 85
that a Brother below the Degree of a M.M. is with-
out. As already stated, the single K. has no Masonic
significance; therefore, when the Candidate is one
for Initiation, the K.'s of the First Degree must be
given. At Emulation Lodge of Improvement, how-
ever, a slight difference is made (possibly for the infor-
mation of the I.G. and J.W.), the K.'s for a Can-
didate being given by the Tyler rather heavier and
more deliberately than in the case of an ordinary report.
Perhaps the best advice that can be tendered to
Brother Tyler is that he should familiarise himself
with the custom of each particular Lodge, thus
avoiding confusion and possible irritation.
A useful service may be rendered by Bro. Tyler
when a Can. is dismissed from the Lodge to restore him-
self to his p.c.'s in any Degree. It is to see that the
Can. knows how to take the Sp. and give the Sn. cor-
rectly when readmitted. In the Third Degree it
may be taken for granted that the Can. certainly
will n ot know what is expected of him. If Bro.
T yler would take this excellent opportunity of
imparting a little fraternal instruction, both Can.'s
and S.D.'s would be saved much confusion, and the
Can.'s re-entry would be a smoother and more
dignified happening than is the general rule.
For an hour or more before the time for the
opening of the Lodge the Tyler will probably be
busy. Furniture and regalia have to be properly
arranged, the anteroom prepared, and various
4>

details attended to so that all may be in readiness

for the Secretary on his arrival. A little later it is
Brother Tyler who is generally held responsible for
seeing that signatures are entered in the Attendance
Book by Members and Visitors. Many other demands
are made upon him. The Lodge being closed,
furniture and regalia have to be collected and
locked safely away, after which the Tyler's ser-
vices are probably required in the dining-room. The
first to arrive, he is the last to leave. Altogether it
may fairly be said that he is one of the hardest-worked
Officers of the Lodge.
Bearing in mind the words of our Brother the
Senior Warden during the closing of the Lodge, let
those of us who are more fortunately placed see to it
at the close of each happy evening that Brother
Tyler 'has had his due.
 &

young Mason who ( appointed a Steward (

taking his first active step on the long journey which
will lead him, it is to be hoped, to the exalted position
occupied by the Master in the East. If there be
but one Steward appointed in his Lodge the journey is
not such a long one, after all, and the newly
appointed Steward may reasonably hope that it will
be his good fortune to win promotion - the Office of
Inner Guard in the near future.
Rule 104, Book of Constitutions, however, sets no
limit on the number of Stewards whom the Master
may appoint. It is not uncommon in large Lodges
for the Master to appoint four or six Stewards,
altho ugh, be it noted, no such appointment as
Senior or junior Steward ( permissible, still less
that of Wine Steward.*
In Lodges where several Stewards are appointed
the Brother receiving his first Collar of Office must per-
force look forward to a lengthy period of appren-
! -!'2 Wine Steward ( ;9 !<!' 3! !2:9 7! !
.;- ' .( 2 . ! - .- . & (! '.- !!-
A ! - ! !A97 (-.99! .(-!' A.( . 2 ( ! 37 - !
'. ! '!-.'7 , ' !2:9 7 - ! -!'2
44

ticeship ; he will be well advised to utilise this

interval by fitting himself for the more important
duties which may perchance fall to his lot sooner
than he anticipates.
In theory the duties of Brother Steward, as sometimes
explained to him by the Worshipful Master, include
'introducing visitors and seeing that they are properly
accommodated,' assisting in the collection of dues and
subscriptions,' and 'generally assisting the Deacons and
other Officers in performing their respective duties.'
In practice Brother Steward will probably find
that the 'introduction of visitors' is a duty attended to
by Brother Director of Ceremonies and his Assistant,
that the collection of dues and subscriptions' is solely a
matter for Brother Treasurer and Brother Secretary,
and that the Deacons and other Officers require
little or no assistance in performing their respective
duties.'
At the same time Brother Steward should not lose
sight of the fact that he is an Officer of the Lodge
and that he may make himself a very useful one. It fre-
quently happens that an Officer is absent, in
which case it is the Steward who should be qualified to
fill the vacancy, a qualification which he can only attain
by diligent attendance at a Lodge of Instruction.
T hu s it ma y we l l hap p en t ha t t h e r e ce nt l y
appointed Steward may even find himself in the
proud position of occupying a Warden's chair if he
has familiarised himself with the work. In this
 89
connection it has somewhere been written that no
Brother is eligible to occupy a Warden's chair in a
regular Lodge unless he shall have been regularly ap-
pointed to that high Office. There appears to be
no reliable authority for such a pronouncement. The
present writer well remembers an occasion in his
Masonic youth when he acted in such a capacity long
before he had received even the junior appointment of
Steward.
From the foregoing it will be seen that Brother
Steward need not think that his duties are entirely
limited to ministering to the wants of his Brethren
during the period of Refreshment, although such
duty is one he must be prepared to undertake cheer-
fully and to discharge efficiently. The proportion of
responsibility which will rest upon him in this connec-
tion depends largely upon Lodge custom. In many
Lodges it is the Treasurer or Secretary who con-
trols such matters as the consumption of wine and
the expenditure with regard to refreshment. It is possi-
ble, too, that the Director of Ceremonies prefers to
attend to the accommodation and seating of the
guests.
The best advice which can be offered to Brother
Steward is that he should show himself ready and
willing at all times to render all possible assistance to his
Senior Officers both at Labour and Refreshment. He
should remember, too, that his Jewel of Office is the
Cornucopia, the emblem of plenty, embraced by the
open Compasses, the symbol of restraint.
 CHAPTER X

Lodges under the English Constitution the Office of

Inner Guard was apparently unkno wn until the
early part of the nineteenth century. The first men-
tion of this Officer in the Constitutions appeared in
1815, and the earliest known reference to his appoint-
ment is to be found in the Minutes of the Burlington
Lodge, now No. 96, dated 14th December 1814.
At one time the Inner Guard was frequently
distinguished by the Trowel as his emblem of Office ; it
was not until 1819 that the Crossed Swords were as-
signed to him in the Constitutions. No change_ has
since been made, and to-day Brother Inner Guard
is informed, when being invested with his Collar of
Office by the Worshipful Master, that his J e wel is
't wo s wo r d s in saltir e.' His p lace is 'within the
entrance of the Lodge' and his duties are as impor-
tant as those of any other Officer; no more and no
less.
It is to be regretted that some young Masons
display a tendency to treat their appointment to the Of-
fice of Inner Guard somewhat lightly, as though
 #*

the duties appertaining thereto were of a nature so

simple as to require but a minimum of preparation and
little serious consideration. Reasonable confidence
in the undertaking of any Office is to be commended;
over-confidence, on the other hand, frequently leads to
bungling, confusion, and consequent disaster.
An illustration of the degree of perfection with
which it is possible to carry out the apparently
simple duties of Inner Guard was indelibly impressed on
the mind of the present writer at the Festival
Meeting of the Emulation Lodge of Improvement,
held in the Grand Temple at Freemasons' Hall in
February 191 9 , upon which occasion the station
within the entrance of the Lodge was occupied by an
experienced Past Master, a member of the Grand Stew-
ards' Lodge,* who discharged the duties of his Office
with a degree of impressive dignity and stately command
which, in all probability, has rarely been equalled and
never excelled at any similar demonstration or elsewhere.
Brother Inner Guard is the link of communication be-
tween the Lodge itself and the outer world, and
under no circumstances should he leave his post
within the entrance of the Lodge. He is in charge
of the door of the Lodge and nothing must induce
him to lose control of the door while it is open; no
Brother, however distinguished in rank, should be per-
mitted to pass between the Inner Guard and the door.
If the Inner Guard will make a practice of
B ' !.9 -A
#/

keeping hold of the door each time he opens it, then

none can pass between him and his charge.
In a well-arranged Temple or Lodge Room the
door should be in the West or quasi-West. There
are many Lodge Rooms where this convenient ar-
rangement is not to be found, but, whatever may be
the location of the door, the correct position for the
Inner Guard's chair is at the immediate left of the S.W.'s
pedestal. All reports should be given from that
position, and from no other.
A report on the door by the Tyler is the signal
( i f no b u si n e ss b e i n p r o gr e s s) fo r t h e I n ner
Guard to rise, take Sp., show Sn. of the Degree,
and, infor m the Junior Warden that there is a
report.'* Upon receiving the J.W.'s answer in the
usual manner Brother Inner Guard discharges Sn.
and goes to the door. Having received the Tyler's an-
nouncement he closes the door, not forgetting to lock
it, returns to position in front of his chair, and repeats
the Tyler's report to the Master. In each case the
Inner Guard must remember not to discharge his
Sn. until he has been answered by the Master or
Junior Warden.
When the Tyler gives a report on the door of
the Lodge the Inner Guard should remember that
he never reports direct to the Master, but always to
the Junior Warden. The J.W. will reply by --,
B .99 .(!( A ! '!: '- - - ! = - ! ( ;9
'!2!23!' - - -;' ( body - A.' ( - ! !
( ;9 (-. (D;.'! - - ! -;' only his head towards
the J.W. when he addresses him.
 #)

or, in the case of a Candidate awaiting admission,

he will first report to the W.M., and will then give
the I.G. verbal instructions. After opening the door
and receiving the T yler's report, the I.G. then
reports direct to the W.M.
When admitting either a Member or Visitor the
I.G. should inform him in what Degree the Lodge is
working, in order that the correct salute may be
given. No Brother, ho wever elevated in rank,
should be admitted to the Lodge until he has been
duly reported to the Master. T he Inner Guard
who is never called upon to exercise his authority in
this connection may count himself fortunate ; it is
noticeable that Brother Secretary (who should
certainly know better!) frequently appears to con-
sider himself vested with the right to slip in and out
of the Lodge in an informal manner. The Inner
Guard who resolutely declines to per mit such
irregularity may possibly earn the momentary dis-
pleasure of an impatient Brother Secretary, but he
should allow no such thought to deter him in the
1'
proper execution of his responsible duties.
B r o ther I nner Guar d sho uld r eme mb er that
Brethren do not ' demand ' admission ; they 'seek' or
'request.' * According to the Emulation system
! 97 '!- '! !-' : 9 -. .( '7 A - : A!' -
!2. 1 . 2 (( - - ! ! .'! - ! '.
.(-!' - ! ' '. .(-!' . - ! !:;-7
'. .(-!' ' < !( . (-' -( - !
' < .9 ' (-' - '. .(-!' . - ! ' !:;-7 '
(( (-. - ' < .9 ' (-' - '. .(-!'( - !'
' - !' .( . 7 (; ' - ; 9!(( . - .( - ! '! -97
#"

neither word is used; the formula is : W.M., Bro.

A.B.,' whereupon the W.M. answers : ' Admit him.'
In only one instance does the Inner Guard ever
address the J.W. by name, i.e. when the Lodge is
being opened in the First Degree. The J.W. will
direct the I.G. by name to see t.t.L.i.p.t. Having
done so the I.G. reports to the J.W. by name that
t.L.i.p.t. In the instance referred to there is no Sp. or
Sn. In every other case the I.G. takes Sp., shows Sn.,
and addresses his Senior Officer in the South as '
Brother Junior Warden.' The Master is never ad-
dressed by name.
Brother Inner Guard must be careful to remember that
in the First Degree only a Candidate is described as '
Mr' when he is announced. In the Seco nd and
T hird Degrees he is ' B rother.' T he I nner Guar d
sho uld never op en the do or to ad mit a Candi-
date for any Degree until the Deacon responsible for
that duty has placed the K.S.* in position,
. '! -! '!:'!(! -.- <! , - ! '. .(-!' !'! ( .
A !(:'!. 2:'!(( 2. 7 '! - ( - .- . '. !
,, !' ( !2: A!'! - !2. 1 . 2 (( 3;- - (
!'' ! ;( '. ,, !' A!<!' '. ? F(.<!
- (! .9'!. 7 2! - ! G .( . 7 '!.-!' 9. 2 - ! -!' .
! - . - ! 7 ; !(- .(-!' .( $ - ! .(-!' .( .
' - - '!,;(! . 2 (( F(!! & .:-!' 8 p.215 :.'. - G
' - 2.7 3! -! ( . '. ,, !' < ( - - ! !
<!(-! A - - ! (9 -!(- .;- ' -7 37 < '-;! , ( '. ? -
-!',!'! . 7 A.7 A - - ! :' !! ( ' D;!(- - !
.(-!'1( -' 9 , .,,. '( , ( . < ! ( ( ; - ;3-9!(( !
A 99 9. 97 <! - $ , - - ! - ! 97 - A (-
; ( !( 2 ,' 2 - !' < ( - '!- '! ( - ! 9 ;' , (
'! .9 .
B !! , - -! : *)/
 #+

nor until both Deacons are ready at the door to

receive the Candidate.
When directed by the W.M. to admit a Candidate
the I.G. must always remember to take with him to
the door the P.n...d, Sq., or C.'s, according to the
De gr e e. I n t he Fi r s t De gr e e, a f ter u se o f t h e
P.n...d the I.G. should hold it aloft to intimate to the
W.M. that it has been so used, and then replace it
on the S.W.'s ped., where the S.D. may find it at
the proper time.*
The I.G. is often uncertain as to the correct method
of applying the P.n...d, Sq., or C.'s. In the First
Degree the p...t of the P.n...d should be applied to
Can.'s n.l.b. In the Second Degree the arms of the
Sq. should be applied. In Third Degree the extended
p...ts of the C.'s simultaneously to Can.'s b.'s.
B - ( - ! ;-7 , - ! . not , - ! - -.?! - !
- - ! ! 9.--!' :'. - ! ( . 22 !
. ( ( 2!- 2!( ;: !9 37 - ! (-.-!2! - - .- - ! (
- ! 1( :.'- ;9.' '? 9 ' 239!2 . 9 ! , '!.(
,, ;9- - , 99 A A ! - ( '!2!23!'! - .- - ! ;(! , - !
- ! '(- ! '!! ( ;:9 .-! !E. -97 37 - ! ;(! ,
- ! D ' & 1( - ! ! . ' ! '!!( ! 1(
239!2 ' =!A!9 , ,, ! .( ! ( , '2! 37 - !
;: <!(- -;'! ( -A (A ' ( (.9- '! 1 !'! ( 3;- !
.'2! ,, !' , - ! ! - ! 79!' A ;.' ( - ! : '
A- . A ( ! ( - . A!.: ! - !' ,
,,! ! ' !,! ! - ( 2 '! - . . 2:9!2! - ;(! , ' .
!'-. :;': (! - ! '(- ! '!! .( .'! - ! D . & 1(
- ! ! . ' ! '!!( . - ( (! (! - ! :! ;9 .'
3. ! !239!2 ' - 9 , - ! ! ( ;9 - 9!.<!
( : (- A - - ! ! -'. ! , - ! ! $ 3;- - ! .(
- ! 1( :.'- ;9.' 2!((! !' ( ''! - .''7 - !
A- 2 - - ! . :9. - - ! 1( :!
'!. 7 , ' ;(! .- . 9.-!' (-. ! , - ! &!'!2 7 F !! .9( :.'.
. : *"4 ; !' @ ! ! ' !. @G
#>

When receiving a Candidate the I.G. should

never go outside the Lodge; his position is within the
entrance of the Lodge, and the Tyler should conduct
the Candidate to such a position that the P.n...d,
Sq., or C.'s may be correctly applied while the I.G. is
standing just within the entrance of the Lodge.
Perhaps it is expecting rather much of Brother
Inner Guard, who is frequently a young and inex-
perienced Mason, to rely upon him to see that
Visiting Brethren are correctly clothed and wearing
no extraneous jewels ; but he should have a watchful eye
for such details. In like manner he should be on the
alert to see that Brother Tyler has made no blunder
in a certain important part of his duties, i.e. that the
Candidate is P.P.
No important ceremonial work should ever be inter-
rupted for the purpose of making a report; r e -
ports given by the Tyler at inconvenient
p er io d s s ho u ld b e i g no r ed . I f i n d o ub t as to
whether to pay heed to a report, the Inner Guard
may try to attract the attention of - ! = $ ,
sign be forthcoming from that quarter, he may
perhaps be able to catch the eye of the W.M. or
I.P.M., receiving from that direction a silent indica-
tion as to whether to announce the report or await a
more convenient moment.
Brother Inner Guard should study - ! following
notes which will be of assistance - him in the
discharge of his duties.
 #0
OPENING THE LODGE
1.The I.G. should show no Sn. when directed
by the J.W. to see t.t.L.i.p.t. The I.G. proceeds
to the door and gives K.'s of the First Degree. He
should not open the door.* The Tyler will answer
with si milar K.'s. The I.G. then returns to
position in front of his chair and reports to the
J.W. by name: 'Bro. . . t.L.i.p.t.' At this
stage there should be no Sp. or Sn.
2.When the W.M. has declared the Lodge
'duly open' and the wardens have given ---I, the
I.G. again proceeds to the door and gives K.'s of
the First Degree, which will be duly answered by
the Tyler.
IN THE
SECOND DEGREE
3.The I.G. shows no Sn. when directed by the
J.W. to see that t.L.i.p.t. He proceeds to the door
and gives K.'s of the First Degree, which will be
a n s we r e d b y t h e T y l e r . I . G . t h e n r e t u r n s t o
position, takes Sp., shows Sn. of E.A., and reports:
'Bro. J.W., the L.i.p.t.' Dis. Sn. after report, keeping
the hand open.
4.When the W.M. has declared the Lodge
J ( '! - .::9 !( - ! :! ( .99 ! '!!(
! = 1( 22. - - ! - 1(!!1 - .- - :- (
- -! ! - 2!. - .- - ! 2;(- . -;.997 :! - !
' ! A ' 1 (!!1 .( - !' 2!. ( - . - :!' ! <!
37 - ! !7! 1 ! . (A!' 1( ,' 2 A - ;- .'! (;,, ! -
.- - .- - ! 79!' ( .- ( : (- . - .- - ! ! (
:-
#4

1 duly open on the Sq.' and the Wardens have

given .the I.G. again proceeds to the door and
gives K.'s of the Second Degree, which will be
answered by the Tyler.

5.The I.G. shows no Sn. when directed by the

J.W. to see t.t.L.i.p.t. He proceeds to the door and
gives the K.'s of the Second Degree, which will be an-
swered by the Tyler. I.G. then returns to position,
takes Sp., shows Sn. of F.C., and reports: 'Bro.
J.W., t.L.i.p.t.' Dis. Sn. after report, keeping both
hands open.
6.When the W.M. has declared the Lodge
`duly open on the C.' and the Wardens have given
the I.G. again proceeds to the door and gives
K.'s of the Third Degree, which will be answered by
the Tyler.
CLOSING THE LODGE IN THE
T HI RD DE GRE E
7.The I.G. shows no Sn. when directed by the
J.W. to 'prove t.L.c.t.' He proceeds to the door
and gives the K.'s of the Third Degree, which will
be answered by the T yler. I.G. then returns to
position, takes Sp., shows P.Sn. of a M.M., and
r ep o r t s : 'B r o . J .W ., t. L. i.c .t. ' Di s. S n. a ft er
report, keeping the hand open, and not forgetting to re-
cover.
8.When the J.W. has declared that the Lodge
 ##
is 'closed accordingly' and given 4, the I.G.
again proceeds to the door and gives K.'s of the
Third Degree, which will be answered by the Tyler.
CLOSING THE LODGE IN THE
SECOND DEGREE
9.The I.G. shows no Sn. when directed by the
J.W. to 'prove t.L.c.t.' He proceeds to the door
and gives the K.'s of the Second Degree, which will
be answered by the T yler. I.G. then returns to
position, takes Sp., shows Sn. of F.C., and reports:
`Bro. t.L.i.c.t.' Dis. Sn. after report, keep-
ing both hands open.
10.When J.W. has given , after 'And Happy
Meet Again,' the I.G. again proceeds to the door
and gives K.'s of the Second Degree, which will be an-
swered by the Tyler.

C L O S I N G T HE L O D G E G E N E R AL L Y
11.The I.G. shows no Sn. when directed by the
J.W. to 'prove t.L.c.t.' He proceeds to the door
and gives the K.'s of the First Degree, which will
be answered by the T yler. I.G. then returns to
position, takes Sp., shows Sn. of E.A. and reports:
'Bro. J.W., t.L.i.c.t.' Dis. Sn. after report, keeping
the hand open.
12.When the J.W. has declared that the Lodge
is 'closed accordingly' and given , the I.G.
again proceeds to the door and gives K.'s of the
First Degree, which will be answered by the Tyler.
*55

T H E C E R E M O N Y O F I N I T I AT I O N
1.When the Tyler gives report for the Can. the
I.G. should rise, take Sp., show Sn. of E.A., and
announce to the J.W.: `Bro. J.W., t.i.a.r.' I.G.
must remain standing to 0. while J.W. reports
to the W.M. Upon receiving J.W.'s instructions
the I.G. should dis. Sn., keeping the hand open.
He then proceeds to the door, opens it, and demands
of the Tyler : Whom h.y.t. ? '*
2.After bidding Tyler to 'Halt, while I report
.. . .,' the I.G. should close the door, not forgetting to
lock it, return to position in front of his chair, take Sp.,
show Sn. of E.A., and repeat T.'s report to the
W.M.
3.When asked by the W.M. whether he vouches
that the Can. is p.p. the I.G. answers: ' I do, W.M.'
The I.G. should not bow to the W.M. when making
this reply.
4.The correct moment for the I.G. to dis. Sn.
is when the W.M. speaks the words, . . in due
form.'
5.The I.G. takes p.n...d and proceeds to the
door. He must not open it until both Deacons are
ready to receive the Candidate. I.G. applies p.n...d
and asks Can. : Do y.f.a. ? ' He then holds
p.n...d aloft so that the W.M. may see it. The I.G.
should place the p.n...d on S.W.'s ped. after use.T
6.When the Tyler gives next report for the
Can. who is waiting to be readmitted for the Charge
the I.G. rises, takes Sp., shows Sn. of E.A., and
announces to the J.W.: Bro, J.W., t.i.a.r.' I.G.
B !! , - -!B p. t
 should not dis. Sn. until the J.W. has answered by
. I.G. then proceeds to the door to receive
Tyler's announcement, after which he closes the
door, not forgetting to lock it, returns to position in
front of his chair, takes Sp., shows Sn. of E.A., and re-
ports: 'W.M., the Can. on his return.' Dis. Sn.
when W.M. has replied. I.G. then again proceeds
to the door, but he should not open it until the J.D. is
ready to receive the Can.
T HE C E R E M O NY O F P AS S I N G
1.When the Tyler gives the report for the Can.
the I.G. should rise, take Sp., show Sn. of F.C., and an-
nounce to the J.W.: 'Bro. J.W., t.i.a.r.' I.G must
remain standing to 0. while J.W. reports to the W.M.
Upon receiving J.W.'s instructions the I.G should
dis. Sn., keeping both hands open. He then proceeds to
the door, opens it, and demands of the Tyler: 'Whom
h.y.t. ?' *
2.After bidding Tyler to 'Halt,' the I.G. pro-
ceeds as in First Degree, returns to position, takes
Sp., shows Sn. of F.C., and repeats report to W.M.
3.Again the I.G. should remember not to bow
to the W.M. when answering: 'I do, W.M.' T
4.The correct moment for the I.G. to dis. Sn.
J !. ! '!! - ! 2;(- '!2!23!' - .- ! ( ;9
- . -;.997 leave the Lodge , ' ( !E.2 .- , - ! &.
! ( ;9 3! (-. just within the entrance of the Lodge and
keeping hold of the door with his left hand F(!! : #>G
- &!'!2 .9 3 A - - ! - ! :.'- , . 7 ,, !' (
D; -! (;:!',9; ;( . ;- , :9. ! ;! '!(:! - - - !
& . ' ( ( A 37 - ! (.9;-! - ,;'- !' ( ! !((.'7
*5/
is when the W.M. speaks the words : '. . . in due
form.'
5.The I.G. now takes the Sq., and proceeds to
the door, waiting until both Deacons are ready be-
fore he opens it. He applies Sq. and holds it aloft
so that the W.M. may see it. (NOTE. See p. 95
for correct method of applying the Sq.)
6.When the Tyler gives report for the Can.
who is waiting to be readmitted for Explanation of
the T.B. the I.G. rises, takes Sp., shows Sn. of F.C.,
and announces to the J.W.: ' Bro. J.W., t.i.a.r.'
I.G. should not dis. Sn. until J.W. has answered by
[image] I.G. then proceeds to the door to re-
ceive Tyler's announcement, after which he closes
the door, not forgetting to lock it, returns to position
in front of his chair, takes Sp., shows Sn. of F.C., and
reports : W.M., the Can. on his return.' Dis. Sn.
when W.M. has replied. I.G. then again proceeds to
the door, but he should not open it until the S.D. is
ready to receive the Can.

THE CEREMONY OF RAISING

1.When the Tyler gives report for the Can.
the I.G. should rise, take Sp., show P.Sn. of a
M.M., and anno unce to the J .W.: `Br o. J.W .,
t.i.a.r.' I.G. must remain standing to 0. while the J
.W . reports to the W.M. Upon receiving the J.W.'s in-
structions the I.G. should dis. Sn., keeping the
hand open, and not forgetting to recover. He then
proceeds to the door, opens it, and demands of the
Tyler : 'Whom h.y.t.?'*
B !! , - -!B :
 103
2.After bidding Tyler to 'Halt ' the I.G. pro-
ceeds as in First and Second Degrees, returns to
position, takes Sp., shows P.Sn. of a M.M., and
repeats report to the W.M.
3.The correct moment for the I.G. to dis. Sn. is
when the W.M. says the words : `. . . in due
form.'
4.The I.G. now takes the C.'s and proceeds to
the door, waiting until both Deacons are ready before
he opens it. He applies the C.'s, and holds them
aloft so that the W.M. may see them. (NOTE.See
p. 95 for correct method of applying the C.'s.)
5.When the Tyler gives report for the Can.
who is waiting to be readmitted for completion of
the Ceremony the I.G. rises, takes Sp., shows P.Sn.
of a M.M., and announces to the J. W.: Bro. J.W.,
t.i.a.r.' I.G. sho uld not dis. Sn. until J.W. has
replied by [image] I.G. then proceeds to the
door to receive Tyler's announcement, after
which he closes the door, not forgetting to lock it, re-
turns to position in front of his chair, takes Sp.,
shows Sn. o f M. M., a n d r ep o r t s : W . M., t he
Ca n. o n hi s r etur n.' Dis. Sn. when W .M. has
r ep lied. I .G. then again proceeds to the door, but
he should not open it until the S.D. is ready to receive
the Can.

Finally, Brother Inner Guard, pay close attention to

the Tyler when he announces to you a Visiting
Brother who is seeking admission. Amazing and
amusing blunders are frequently heard from nervous
Inner Guards when announcing the rank of a visitor. In
any case of doubt do not be afraid to ask Brother
*5"

Tyler to repeat his announcement. Never hurry

about your duties ; remember that your work is of
equal importance - that of your senior Officers.
Give your reports slowly and distinctly, maintain
an erect attitude and a confident demeanour, and
you will do your share towards preserving that
dignity and decorum which should characterise all
our proceedings.
 &

& the sixth on the

list of permissive Officers, i.e. those Officers who,

in accordance with Rule 104 in the Constitutions,
may be appointed if the Worshipful Master so
desires. In Lodges where such an appointment is
made the Assistant Secretary ranks immediately
above the I nner Guard. His Jewel of Office is
'two pens in saltire surmounted by a bar bearing
the word Assistant.'
As is denoted by the name of his Office, Brother As-
sistant Secretary's duty is to act as helper to his
Senior Officer in the No rth. T hat help may be
rendered in a variety of ways, but so much depends
upon the personality of Brother Secretary, as well
as upon Lodge customs, that no useful purpose
would here be served by endeavouring to set out in
detail the duties of an Assistant Secretary.
In some Lodges the Office is made a progressive
one,* being regarded as the next step in promotion
B -' -97 (:!.? ,, ! . ! '! .' ! .( 1:' '!(( <!1
- ! (! (! - .- - ! ,, !' .( . 7 right ' claim - :' '!(( - !'!
,' 2 - !' ,, ! - ! , 99 A 7!.' ;9! + "
*5>

after the Office of Inner Guard. Where such a

custom obtains the young Mason invested with the Col-
lar of Assistant Secretary will, in all probability, find
his Office to be in the nature of a sinecure. Lack
of knowledge and experience make it impossible for
him to render useful assistance in any matters of impor-
tance, and few Lodge Secretaries have either the
time or the inclination to teach a fresh Assistant each
year.
In other Lodges the practice is adopted of appoint-
ing the same Assistant Secretary year after year. In
such cases the Brother selected by succeeding
Masters is usually a trustworthy Past Master, and
here valuable assistance can be rendered if Brother Sec-
retary will accept it. The doubt implied by the
italics is not an imaginary one because, strangely
enough, there are some Lodge Secretaries who seem to
resent the appointment of an Assistant Secretary, appar-
ently regarding such an appointment as a reflec-
tion on their own abilities.
Where such a state of affairs exists Worshipful
Brother Assistant Secretary will probably resign
himself to the prospect of wearing his Collar of
Office in enforced idleness ; but, where happier
conditions obtain, he can become a very real helper
to his Senior Officer and an asset to his Lodge.
With the enormous and continued growth in the
B. of & !2: .( (!( - .- ' - !' .( - ! ' - - 9. 2
. <. !2! - 37 ' -.- 1 ! .:: -2! - , all ,, !'(
!E !:- - ! '!.(;'!' . 79!' ( - ! ( 9! ( '!- .
: A!' , - ! .(-!'
 & *50

size of many Lodges the work at the Secretary's table has

increased proportionately. The sole responsibility
for the proper discharge of that work must, of course,
rest with Brother Secretary himself ; but, where he
accepts the willing aid of an efficient Assistant,
he will find his labours considerably lightened and
there will be little likelihood of the secretarial work of
the Lodge falling into arrears.
 CHAPTER XII

Office of Brother Organist is one which, as

stated in Rule 104 of the Constitutions, 'may' be
filled if the Worshipful Master so decides.
Whether it should be filled is dependent upon the
talent available. Certainly a Master will be wise
who leaves the Office vacant rather than appoint a
Brother lacking in musical ability. Unfortunately
such appointments are frequently made, but the
Brother who accepts the Lyre as his Emblem of
Office without possessing the qualifications essential
to enable him to discharge the duties of that Office in an
efficient manner is something more than a source of
embarrassment to his Lodge; he is a nuisance.
In cases where no Brother skilled in the divine
art of Music is to be found among the members of
the Lodge, and where financial or other considera-
tions prohibit the engagement of a paid musician,
the Master will be well advised to remember that
music is no essential part of Masonry and that our cere-
monies need lose nothing of their solemn beauty al-
though music be entirely absent from the pro-
ceedings. 108
 *5#

Assuming that an expert musical Brother is avail-

able, his duties are such as cannot be set out in
detail within the space of a few paragraphs. The accom-
paniment of the Opening and Closing Odes, and of
the chanting of the responses to the Prayers, are ob-
vious duties. All else must be dependent to a great
extent upon the customs existing in any particular
Lodge.
However accomplished a musician the Organist
may be, he must study the Ritual of the various
Ceremonies closely if his efforts are to be effective.
The newly appointed Organist who is young in the
Craft will do well to limit his activities to the points
above mentioned, and not to attempt incidental
music during the Ceremonies. Later, as he gains experi-
ence and confidence, he will be able to make musical
interpolations with advantage.
No disrespect to Brother Organist is intended if
he is here reminded that he had better be heard too sel-
do m than too fr eq uently; the o r gan sho uld
never be permitted to obtrude unduly on the Cere-
mony. The greatest care is necessary in the inter-
polation of musical phrases ; they must be carefully
timed, and terminate precisely at the right moment.
The selection of suitable music for incidental
phrases during the Ceremonies may safely be left to
the discretion of an experienced musician who is
also possessed of a sense of Masonic fitness. There
are, however, two important points to which the
attention of Brother Organist may be directed.
 5

The first is during the Ceremony of Initiation

when, after the Ob., the Candidate is about to be
restored to L...t. At this solemn moment when the Breth-
ren, at a given signal from the W.M., make a certain
movement, a loud chord from the organ is often
heard. Such a proceeding can only be termed undignified
and quite out of place.
Even more undesirable is the interposition of
light secular music following the investiture of the dif-
ferent Officers at the Installation Meeting. Dur-
ing these proceedings the present writer has heard
the air of 'For He's a Jolly Good Fellow' coming
from the organ at the investing of the Secretary,
and the strains of 'Poor Old Joe' greeting the reap-
pointment of the Tyler.
It has to be admitted that even Organists of con-
siderable experience sometimes err in this direction. The
Worshipful Master will be acting wisely if he gently
but firmly intimates that such musical interpolations are
undesirable and out of place.
 CHAPTER XIII

1 O f f i ce i s o n e o f 2 !'
origin ; no mention o f it is to be found in the
Co n stitu tio n s until the year 191o. His jewel is 'a
scrip purse upon which is a heart.' In the table of
precedence the Almoner ranks between the
Assistant Director of Ceremonies and the Organist.
During the impressive ceremony of Initiation we
are reminded that we have ranged under our banners
Brethren who are reduced to the lowest ebb of
poverty and distress. To bring relief to such dis-
tressed Brethren is the duty of Brother Almoner,
and to supplement the funds for this worthy cause it
is the custom in most Lodges for the Almoner to
circulate the Charity Box among the Brethren.
Whether this should be done in Open Lodge or
deferred until the period of Refreshment is a ques-
tion upon which there exists a divergence of opinion. The
question is one which must be left to individual Mas-
ters, who will doubtless be guided b y the prac-
tice existing in their respective Lodges.
The question as to whether visiting Brethren
should be asked or allowed to contribute to the
**/

Charity Box is another upon which varying opinions are

held. It is scarcely to be expected that in any
Lodge the Charity Box would be unduly obtruded
upon a guest, but there can be no harm in allowing a
Visiting Brother to contribute his mite to such an excel-
lent cause if he so desires. When the present writer
is asked by a Brother who is about to take round
the Charity Box whether it is to be taken to the
Visitors he invariably answers : "Pass them
slowly."
In many Lodges the custom exists of making the Al-
moner's Office a progressive * one, the Brother who
has filled the Office of Inner Guard (or perhaps Assis-
tant Secretary) one year acting as Almoner the next.
T here is much to be said against such a prac-
tice ; it is highly improbable that the junior Ma-
son, who has some five or six years to wait before he
attains the rank of an Installed Master, can possess the
necessary experience to qualify him to discharge the
duties of the Almoner's Office in an efficient
manner.
Frequently, when application is made for relief, con-
siderable experience is essential to enable Brother Al-
moner to decide whether the case is one worthy of
support, for it is unhappily true that we have in our
midst Masonic vagrants who seek to trade upon their
connection with the Order by imposing upon the
charitable instincts of the Brethren.
The Almoner who is reappointed year after year,
J !! , - -! : *5+ ; !' @ (( (-. - ! '!-.'7 @
 113
and who thus becomes as permanent an Officer of
the Lodge as the Treasurer and Secretary,* accumu-
lates a store of experience which cannot fail to be
of advantage to him in the execution of his duties.
From all points of view Brother Almoner should be a
permanent Officer of the Lodge and a Past Master of
experience.

B . 9 -!'.9 (! (! - !'! .'! , ;'(! :!'2. ! - 1

,, !'( , . ! !. ,, !' 3! .:: -! F ' !9! -! G
!. 7!.' !<!'- !9!(( - ( - ! ;(- 2 2. 7 !( , '
(; ,, !'( .( - ! '!.(;'!' ! '!-.'7 & ' . (- !- -
9 - ! ' ,, !( , ' 9 :!' ( ( - .- - !7 3! 2!
:'. - ! if - - ! '7 2 '! ' 9!(( 1 :!'2. ! -1 ,, .9(
 CHAPTER XIV
& &

* 4 Book of Constitutions, states that the

Grand Master shall appoint two Deputy Grand
Directors of Ceremonies and twelve Assistant Grand
Directors of Ceremonies. It should be noted that
there is a wide difference between the two Offices.
The ' Deputy,' as his designation denotes, is one
appointed to act in the place of his Senior Officer
when occasion demands, whereas the ' Assistant' is
an auxiliary Officer whose duty it is to render such
assistance as may be required of him.
It would appear, therefore, that in a Private Lodge our
Brother the Assistant Director of Ceremonies
would be more correctly designated as ' Deputy '
since, as a general rule, he is expected to deputise in
the absence of the Director of Ceremonies.
As in the case of the Almoner and Assistant Secretary,
the Office of Assistant Director of Ceremonies is in
many Lodges made a progressive * one, the Brother
acting in that capacity one year progressing to the Office
of Junior Deacon the following year, always provided
that the Master is pleased to promote him.
B *5+ ; !' @
 !

There is much to be said against the practice and

little in its favour. The younger Brother who is
wo r king his wa y up war d thro ugh the vario us
Offices cannot be expected to possess the wide
experience which is essential for the efficient dis-
charge of the manifold duties of a Director of Cere-
monies, and he is consequently unfitted to act in
that capacity in the absence of his Senior Officer.
On Installation nights, for instance, he would be
compelled to be absent from the Lodge during the
most important part of the proceedings.
Undoubtedly the Assistant Director of Ceremonies
sho uld b e a P ast Master and , wher e t he r igh t
Brother has been found for the Office, the newly
installed Master will be wise to confirm the choice of
his predecessor by reappointing the previous
holder of the Office.
To attempt to set out in detail the duties of the
Assistant Director of Ceremonies would necessitate a
recapitulation of the points dealt with in Chapter
XVIII, for the efficient Assistant should be in every
way as expert in the mysteries of the Craft as his
Senior Officer. As already mentioned, it is his duty
to deputise in the absence of the Director of Cere-
monies, and he can only discharge such a responsible
duty in a proper manner if he be thoroughly con-
versant with Masonic etiquette and the conducting of
our ceremonial proceedings. Brother Assistant Di-
rector of Ceremonies should read Chapter XVIII care-
fully, and master the hints therein contained.
*>

Where the Junior Officer is acting in his capacity

of Assistant it is essential that he should arrive at a
perfect understanding with his senior Brother and
that he should know exactly what is expected of
him. However distinguished a Past Master he may
be, the Assistant Director of Ceremonies should
ever be on his guard not to allow any excess of zeal to
influence him to ' jump in' and take upon himself any
duty rightly belonging to the Director of Ceremonies.
Any such action, however well intended, would be
likely to lead to regrettable friction.
On the other hand, where perfect understanding
and fraternal goodwill exist between the Director
of Ceremonies and his Assistant the ceremonial
portion of our solemn proceedings will certainly be con-
ducted with imposing dignity and decorum, and Profit
and Pleasure will be the happy result.*
B !! , - -! : *+0 .( - & 1( (-.- - ! !
 CHAPTER XV

would be difficult in these days even for the most

imaginative Brother to conceive a mental picture of our
Craft Ceremonies being carried through without the as-
sistance of those , our Brethren who are distin-
guished by the familiar emblem of a Dove bearing a
Branch of Olive, the symbol of Peace and Knowledge.
Yet the general adoption of the Office of Deacon,
as we know it to-day, is of fairly modern origin in
private Lodges working under the jurisdiction of
the United Grand Lodge of England. In the early
Scotch and Irish Lodges Deacons were important offi-
cials, and in the ancient records of a few private English
Lodges references to Deacons are to be found as
far back as the early part of the eighteenth century; but
these useful Officers were not commonly known in
English Lodges working under the Regular Grand Lodge
until some eighty years later.
It was on 13th December 18o9 that the Brethren of
the Lodge of Promulgation resolved that:
"Deacons being proved on due investigation to
be not only ancient but useful and necessary Officers, be
recommended."
 **4

The fact that, prior to that time, Brother Deacon

had not been considered a necessary Officer in the ma-
jority o f E nglish Lodges suggests that the re-
spective Ceremonies of Making, Passing, and
Raising a Mason must have been of an extremely
simple order, with very little work of a ceremonial na-
ture.
In these modern times, as is well known, the
duties of the Deacons are of the utmost import-
ance. Indeed, if any one Office in the Lodge can be
said to be of greater importance than another, it is
surely that of the Deacon. It has often been said
that it is the Deacons who make or mar the suc-
cess of any one of our Ceremonies. There is much
truth in the statement. E ven though the work of
the Master be imperfect, halting, and slovenly,
smart and correct work by the Deacons will do much
towards removing an unfavourable impression of the
proceedings as a whole. On the contrary, it is equally
true that, however impressive and excellent may be
the work of the Master, the whole effect of the
Ceremony will inevitably be ruined, should the Dea-
cons perform their respective duties in a slipshod, hesitat-
ing manner.
It must be remembered that Brother Deacon is in
the focus of the limelight practically from start to
finish. He is the cynosure of all eyes, for the simple rea-
son that he is in immediate charge of the Candidate;
and the Candidate is the centre of interest and attraction.
Without efficiency on the part of the
 119
Deacons it is no exaggeration to say that our solemn
and beautiful Ceremonies cannot possibly produce
that desirable effect which they should always pro-
duce in the heart and mind of a Candidate in any
Degree.
Every Deacon, Senior or Junior, should have a thor-
ough knowledge of the Ritual ; to be efficient and
reliable in the discharge of his important duties he
should be as familiar with the Ritual of the Three De-
grees as the Master himself. The Deacon who is
happily conversant with the Ritual will know
exactly what to do, how to do it, and when to do it.
As a result any awkward hiatus in the proceedings
will thus be avoided.
In many systems of working the Deacons receive fre-
quent prompting as to their movements from the Master,
a form of procedure which can scarcely be said to
add to the dignity of any solemn ceremony. In Emu-
lation-working, the system with which we are here
concerned, no such interruptions mar the smooth
progress of the Ceremony. Brother Deacon is ex-
pected to know his work.
Assuming that the newly invested Deacon, for
whom these words are written, has acquired some fa-
miliarity with the wording of the Ceremonies, he will
probably proceed to make the discovery that the respon-
sible duties of his Office are such as to demand a com-
prehensive knowledge of many details not to be
learnt from any printed Ritual. Accurate though the
printed Ritual may be in the actual phraseology
*/5

of the Ceremonics, limitations of space preclude the

inclusion therein of those essential directions without
which the young Mason, recently invested or about to
be invested with a Deacon's collar, is left in a bewilder-
ing state of uncertainty.
The following general hints and directions are
o ffer ed fo r the g uid anc e o f ne wl y ap p o inted
Deacons, but it is here urged upon our younger
Brethren that there is one place and one place only
where they can acquire the requisite knowledge to fit
them for the proper discharge of the obligations of
their Office. That place, needless to say, is
within a regularly constituted Lodge of Instruction, pre-
sided over by a competent and trustworthy Pre-
ceptor.*

GE NE RAL HI NT S FOR DE ACONS

1.When giving Directions.
The direction to the Can. to s.o.w.t.l.f. should be whis-
pered or spoken in an undertone. Similarly the direc-
tions as to how he should place his , for the three
irreg. sps. in adv. to the W.M.'s ped. in the First
Degree. Most other directions should be spoken
quite distinctly.
2.When Prompting.
Do not whisper or mumble. Speak clearly and
audibly so that the prompts can be heard by all the Breth-
ren and much will be done towards keeping the
B !! : /00 , ' 9 (- , '! (! 2;9.- A '?
!( , (-'; -
attention o f the assembly concentrated on the
Ceremony.
3.The Deacon's Wand.
The Deacon should remember that his wand is his '
Badge of Office.' He should not use it as a walking-
stick when perambulating the Lodge, nor as a crutch
when standing still. There can scarcely be a more undig-
nified sight in the Lodge than the Deacon who clutches
his wand with both hands and leans upon it. Unfortu-
nately such a spectacle is all too common. The wand
should be held lightly and naturally at about the
centre, the butt kept an inch or so from the floor
when perambulating the Lodge, and resting lightly on
the floor when at a halt. The Deacon should keep
his wand perpendicular. Above all, it should be
kept in the right hand and the Deacon cannot well
go wrong. The only occasions when a Deacon need
transfer his wand to his left hand are during Obs.
and Prs. when the r.h. may be otherwise engaged.
With a little practice all Sns. can be given without
the wand being transferred to the 1.h. It is not nec-
essary for the S.D. to take his wand when fetching
the Minute Book from the Secretary's table to the Mas-
ter's ped, for signature; nor for the J.D. to take his
wand when attending to the changing the T.B.'s; nor
for either Deacon to carry his wand when attending
to duties in connection with a ballot. At all other
times the Deacons should carry their wands.
4.General Demeanour.
Maintain a smart, soldierly bearing throughout
the ceremony. Deacons can command the attention
*//

of the Brethren by their manner. Keep alert. Do

not allow your thoughts to wander or you will miss
your cues. Follow the work of the W.M. and W.'s
closely.
5.Turning Movements with Candidate.
Much indecision is displayed by Deacons when turn-
ing away from the W.M.'s ped., and again at the
N.W. corner of the Lodge. Deacons should re-
member always to turn so that they interpose them-
selves between the Can. and the W.M.'s ped. The
single exception to this rule is immediately after a
Can. has been entrusted with the P.G. and P.W
leading to a higher Degree.
6.Candidate's Sns.
Never permit a Can. to give a Sn. until he has
first taken the Sp. Always direct the Can. in a
whisper to take the Sp. and if necessary check a
premature Sn. with your 1.h.
7.Ballots.
When there is a ballot to be taken the J.D. goes
ahead with the voting tokens, the S.D. following
with the box. The J.D. should give the first token to
the I.P.M., then proceed down the S., across the W.,
up the N., and so back to the E., giving the last token to
the W.M.* The S.D. should first submit the ballot-
box to the W.M. or I.P.M. for examination before
proceeding to collect the tokens. It
J ; ( - ! 2!- , 99 A! .- - ! 2;9.- ! ,
2:' <!2! - 2. 7 '! ;9.' !( - ! :'. - ! ( , '
- != - <! - ! first - ?! - - !
must be quite certain that the ' Nay ' drawer is
empty before the tokens are collected.
8.--Opening and Closing the Lodge.
It is the duty of the junior Deacon to attend &+
the changing of the T.B.'s.*
9.Minutes.
When the W.M. has declared the Minutes con-
firmed it is the duty of the S.D. to fetch the Minute-
Book from the Secretary's table, present it for
signature, and return it to the Secretary. 'T '
S.D. should try to avoid resting the Minute-Book on
the V.S.L. (NOTE.See para. 3, p. */* as to wand.)
Further and more detailed directions relating to
the work of the Deacons are set out in the two
subsequent chapters.
B ;' - ! :! . &9 ( , - ! ! . 7
! '!! - ! = ( ;9 not 9!.<! ( :9. ! - .--! - - !
; - 9 after - ! = .( <! 1( - ( - 3! '! '!--!
- .- 2. 7 , - ! '! (! !( , (-'; - - ! (
-.; - - .--! - - ( ;-7 22! .-!97 - ! .(-!' .(
<! 1( ;' - ! :! ( '- ! .( ! ( ;'
- ! &9 ( ( A - - ! '!(;9- - .- ;' - ! &9 ( ( - !
= ( .;( ,;( 37 2 < .3 ;- - ! ! while the
J.W. is speaking. ,! . ' !'97 !'!2 .9 (;'!97
!2. ( - .- - ! = ( ;9 3! :!'2 --! - 2:9!-! (
: '- , - ! &!'!2 7 A - ;- (; -!'';:- !
:9!. - .- - ! ;(- 2 '!,!''! - (.<!( - 2! 1 3 ' !'( - !
' ;9 ;( ! - 2! (.<! 1 . - 3! 2 '! - . -A '
- '!! (! (H. : ' !E ;(! , ' - ! (. ' , ! , ! ';2
, - - ! 2;9.- ! , 2:' <!2! - - ( ( - !
.( - ! ;-!( .'! -( !
 CHAPTER XVI
= &

situation of the Junior Deacon is at the right of

the Senior Warden, and his duties, as explained to
him on investiture, include attendance on Candidates
during the Ceremony of Initiation. A little reflec-
tion may show that these few italicised words refer to
what may perhaps be described as the most important
duty in the whole gamut of Masonic Ceremonial,
with the single exception of the duties of the Worship-
ful Master.
First impressions in Masonry, as in other spheres
of life, are often indelible. It is the Junior Deacon
who receives from the hands of the Inner Guard
the blind, helpless seeker after Masonic light. Any sug-
gestion of bungling, of undue nervousness, or, what
would be far worse, of levity, displayed by the Junior
Deacon at this solemn juncture might well destroy
for all time the Candidate's favourable impres-
sions of the beneficent Fraternity into which he is
seeking admission. Gentle firmness, combined with
complete self-control and proper knowledge, on the
part of the Junior Deacon, may do much towards
producing in the Candidate's mind a love
 = & 125
for the Craft which may never fade with the passing
of the years.
Brother Junior Deacon may well pay heed to
those impressive words contained in the Second
Section of the First Lecture which tell how the
Candidate being 'neither naked nor clothed, barefoot nor
shod, but in an humble, halting, moving posture' was
'friendly taken by the right hand.'
Friendly taken by the right hand. The Junior
Deacon should remember that word upon which
e mp h a si s i s p l aced a nd r eg ar d i t a s no u n i m-
portant part of his duty to constitute himself the
guiding friend of the novice in his charge. It may
rest very largely with the Junior Deacon whether
there remains in the Candidate's mind a lasting and beau-
tiful impression of the solemn ceremony of his entry
into our Order.
Much may be done by the tactful Junior Deacon
to help a Candidate even before the Ceremony of
his Initiation. In the course of a brief, friendly
chat in the anteroom the ice may be broken, as it
were, and a few brotherly hints conveyed without, of
course, revealing anything that should remain
hidden. A very nervous Candidate tends to mar a Cere-
mony; some Candidates anticipate foolery, prac-
tical jokingeven danger. Brother Junior Dea-
con may tactfully explain that the Ceremony about
to take place is of a serious and solemn nature and that
there is no cause for fear.
The annexed guiding hints in connection with the
/> H

Initiation and subsequent Ceremonies should be

carefully studied by the Junior Deacon.
T H E C E R E M O N Y O F I N I T I AT I O N
1.In this Degree, during the actual Ceremony,
the seniority of the Deacons may be said to be
reversed; it is the Junior Deacon who is in control of
the Candidate, the S.D. acting in the capacity of
assistant where necessary.
2.The W.M. having given directions for the
Can.'s admission, the J.D. takes his wand in his r.h.
and goes to the door. He should receive the Can.
gently, but his hold should be a firm one; nothing is
more likely to increase a Can.'s bewilderment and nerv-
ousness than being controlled in a limp, hesitating
manner. T he best method of controlling a Can.,
particularly in the early stages of the Initiation Cere-
mony, is for the Deacon to see that his 1.a. is behind
the Can.'s r.a. J.D. leads Can, slowly to the K.S.
3.J.D. should prompt the response to the W.M.'s
first question in a low, clear voice. If hesitation is
shown by Can. after W.M.'s first direction J.D.
should whisper to Can. that the K.S. is before him.
J.D. transfers wand to 1.h., elevates it,* and places
r.h. in correct attitude for Pr. The Candidate's r.h. is
not so placed in this Degree. While the Can, is h.-
w. the J.D. should never release his hand except during
the Ob. and Pr.
B ! !9!<.-! - ! !. (1 A. (( ;9 .9A.7( 3!
' ((! (722!-' .997 . C;(- - ;
 = & /0

4.After the Pr. and subsequent question the

J.D. assists Can. to rise and awaits W.M.'s pro-
clamation before the perambulation. Square each
corner of the Lodge carefully, whispering to Can. at
start of each movement to s.o.w.t.l.f ................ At the
Wardens' stations the signals on their s ...... rs should
be given firmly, but not heavily.
5.After the perambulation the J.D. places Can.'s
r.h. in S.W.'s 1.h. See that Can. is facing the E.
and take place in line on his left. T he Deacon
sho uld never b e hid d en b ehind the Can. J .D.
should be alert to take charge of Can. again at the
proper moment, and stand facing E. while receiving
the S.W.'s directions. No Sn. when addressed by S.W .
6.J.D. leads Can. diagonally (no squaring) to
correct position for the three irreg. sps. About a
yar d fro m the W.M.'s ped. is sufficient. Give
directions clearly, retaining firm grip, thus practically
compelling obedience. The J.D. should not use his
wand here to touch Can.'s f..t.
7 .B e fo r e co m me n c e m en t o f Ob . t he J .D.
transfers wand to his 1.h., elevates it,* takes Sp.,
and shows P.Sn. of an E.A. The correct moment
to dis. Sn. is immediately the Can. has repeated the
final words of the Ob. The J.D. should remember
that when the Can. is asked by the W.M. if he is
willing to take the S.Ob. his answer should be
vo l u n tar y; h e s ho uld n o t b e p r o mp t ed to sa y "
I am." 'T'-
/ (( *++&,+&(. - 0
& * %, '(12&%&(1 - ! !. ( ;9 A (:!' - 2- .
(A!' 3;- . ; - ( ;9 - ! !. 22! .-!97 (.7
@ (A!' @ .; 397 ! A ' ( :.'- , - ! -;.9 .
. 7 (; :'. - ! ( -'.'7 - ''! - 2;9.- A '?
*/4
8.T he restoration to L...t is of the utmost
importance. The J.D. is frequently too late or too
early in discharging a certain duty; proper under-
standing between the W.M. and J.D. is essential if
an effective impression is to be obtained. J.D.
should catch W.M.'s eye to indicate that he is ready,
removing h.-w. at exact moment of W.M.'s final move-
*
ment with If the Can. remains still with eyes
directed to V.S.L. there is no need for J.D. to touch
his h..d.
9.The W.M. having completed certain duties
now following, the J.D. should place the Can. at N.
side of the ped. Do not be too late or too early in
removing the c.-t. The correct moment is as
W.M. says the words, '. . . and done his duty.'
During the entrusting the J.D. should be ready to
assist if necessary, but he should not interfere un-
duly. J.D. should not give the Sn. when W.M.
d o e s s o . J . D . m u s t b e q u i c k wi t h p r o mp t i n
response to W.M.'s third question or the Can.
may answer voluntarily and incorrectly. When
th e W .M. g i ve s t h e W . th e J .D. r ep ea ts it to
the Can., who must repeat it after him. Similar
repetition by J.D. and Can. when the W.M. spells
the W.
10.After the entrusting the Lodge should be
carefully squared when J.D. conducts Can. to the War-
dens' stations. J.D. must remember to take Sp.
and show Sn. before speaking at J.W.'s station.
J !! :.'. + : /)>
K - - ( (-. ! . .- ( 2 9.' (-. ! ! ! '!! - !
&. ( ;9 3! ; !' - ! ( 9! '! - , - ! !
!. ( ;9 - -!',!'! ; 9!(( .3( 9;-!97 ! !((.'7
 = & */#

Similarly at S.W.'s station. Do not transfer wand

to l.h. to give the Sn. If the butt of the wand is
pushed slightly forward and the tip allowed to rest
against the right shoulder the Sns. of all degrees
can be given without transferring wand to the 1.h.
(see para. 3, p. 12i). Dis. Sn. before J.W. replies.
Similarly at S.W.'s station.* Dur ing examina-
tion at S.W.'s station J.D. must remember that
Can. does not give the Sn. when directed to advance.
Direct him in a whisper , checking any prema-
ture Sn. if necessary by placing 1.h. on Can.'s r.
w...t.
11.It is the S.W.'s duty to invest the Can. with
the distinguishing badge of a M., but the J.D. should be
ready to assist if necessary. At conclusion of
S.W.'s remarks J.D. should turn Can. to face the
E. and stand in line on his right. After W.M.'s
address respecting the badge the J.D. awaits in-
structions to proceed. J.D. must be careful not
to forget necessary instructions to the Can. at the
N.E . cor ner. T he co rrect po sitio n at the N.E.
corner is just in line with the front o f W.M.'s
ped.
12.At the N.E. corner the J.D. sho uld n o t
leave the Can. standing alone while he goes to look
for the alms-dish ; if it is not forthcoming it is
sufficient for the J.D. to extend his 1.h. when putting
the first question to Can. J.D. should lower the
alms-dish (or his hand) after Can. has signified that
B ! - ! &. 22; .-!( - ! ' .- - ! .' ! (1
(-.- ( - ( . (;3(!D;! - ! '!!( - ! !. ( ;9
. C;(- - A - (9 over - ! &. 1( ' . - ! !. '!-.
( A. ('
45-9
 3
he has nothing to give. J.D. should remember
that the Can. is frequently confused when asked if
he has 'anything to give in the cause . . If
Can. does not answer the J.D. should proceed at
once with the second question.* J.D. should stand di-
rectly in front of the W.M.'s ped., taking Sp. and show-
ing Sn. before reporting that 'Our new-made Brother
affirms ..
13.The J.D. should be alert to take the Can. to
the front of W.M.'s ped. at the correct moment for expla-
nation of the W.T.'s, etc.
14.When Can. is dismissed by the W.M. the
J.D. conducts him direct to the of the S.W.
without squaring. J.D. instructs Can. to salute the
W.M. as a M. Can. then retires, the escorting
him to the door.
15.On the Can.'s return for the Charge the
meets him at the door, conducts him to of the
S.W., and directs him to salute the W.M. as a M.
The Can. should not be placed in the centre of the
Lodge unless at the express direction of the W.M.
The Can.'s correct position for the Charge is in the
) , 1+4( +56(1 &'( -$%7&27( 21 %5+-&(5 %& &'21 -+2,& +*
72$789%&2,6 &'( %941 521' %4+,6 &'( $(&'$(, $+8,5 &'( +56(. &'(
-$(1(,&2,6 2& &+ &'( %, 9%1& 87' % -$%7&27( 7%, +,9: ;(
$(6%$5(5 %1 %, 8,5(12$%;9( 2,,+<%&2+, =2&' ,+&'2,6 &+ ;( 1%25 2, 2&1
*%<+8$ '($( 21 487' &+ ;( 1%25 %6%2,1& 2& & 7%, +,9: %55
8,,(7(11%$29: &+ &'( %, 1 7+,*812+,. ='29( 2& 7$(%&(1 % 521&8$;2,6
'2%&81 %& % 4+1& 24-+$&%,& -+2,& 2, &'( ($(4+,:
> (( -%$% ?. - *//
'( %, 1'+895 %9=%:1 ;( -($42&&(5 &+ 9(%<( &'( +56( %&
&'21 1&%6( &+ $(1&+$( '241(9* &+ '21 - 7 1 '( 19+<(,9: 781
&+4 +* 62<2,6 &'( '%$6( =2&'+8& %99+=2,6 &'( %, &+ $(&2$(
@+, &'( -$(&(A& +* B1%<2,6 &24( C 21 +,( &+ ;( 5(-$(7%&(5 ;: %99
;(92(<($1 2, +$5($9: %,5 526,2*2(5 7($(4+,2%9
W. at the 1, of the S.W. At the conclusion of the
Charge the J.D. conducts Can. to a seat and resumes
his own seat at the r. of the S.W. The Can. should
not be directed to salute after the Charge.
Note.Except during the few moments when
standing in front of the Can. to ask certain questions at
the N.E. corner of the Lodge the J.D. should
never under any circumstances leave him unattended at
any time during the Ceremony.

T HE C E R E M O NY O F P AS S I N G
1.The J.D. should remember that he is again in
charge of the Candidate until the Lodge is actually open
in the Second Degree, i.e. during his examination by
the W.M. and while he is being entrusted with the
P.G. and P.W. After the W.M.'s announcement that
'Bro. A. B. is this evening a Candidate . . .' the
J.D. conducts Can. to the W. at 1. of the S.W., and
stands with him facing E.* J.D. should be ready to
prompt if necessary.
2.At conclusion of Examination J.D. conducts
Can, to N. side of the W.M.'s ped. without squaring.
J.D. repeats the P.W. after W.M., and Can. repeats it
after J.D.
3.After the entrusting J.D. conducts Can.
straight to the W. at 1. of the S.W. without squar-
ing.[image1]
& 489%&2+, +56( +* 4-$+<(4(,& &'( -9%7(1 %, 2,
-+12&2+, before &'( 1 %,,+8,7(4(,&. ;8& &'( 4(&'+5
2, 5 27 %&(5 2, - % $% $ % ;+ <( 21 &' ( - $%7& 27( *+ 99+=(5 2, &' (
4%D+$2&: +* $(689%$ 489%&2+, =+$E2,6 +56(1
K (( -%$% !. - *//
*)/

Can. is directed to salute the W.M. as a M. He then re-

tires, the J.D. escorting him to the door.
(The Lodge is here Opened or Resumed
in the Second Degree.)
The Lodge being opened in the Second Degree
the Junior Deacon immediately becomes assistant to
his Brother the Senior Deacon. There is little for
the Junior Deacon to do during the Ceremony of
Passing, but his duties should be carried out with the
same scrupulous care as those appertaining to the
previous Degree. Brother Junior Deacon should pay
careful attention to the following hints :
4.--Before admission of the Can. the J.D. should
place the K.S. in correct position * and proceed to
the door with the S.D. After S.D. has instructed
the Can. as to the method of advancing the J.D.
should be careful to notice if the K.S. is in exact
position for the Can. to make use of it without
B ' - 2;9.- :'. - ! - ! ''! - : ( - , '
- ! - ! FA ! - ;(!G ( 3!, '! - ! 1( :!
. - ( - ! ;-7 , - ! - ! '(- ! '!! . - ! =
- ! ! . ' ! '!!( - :9. ! - :' :!' : ( - , ' ;(!
5, - ! &. ;' - ! ' . .,-!'A.' ( - '!:9. ! - ( .-;
'.997 2:9 !( - .- - ! ( . (2.99 ! A . 3! <!
! -97 . 9! 37 ! ,, !' ( 2! !( A!<!'
2 '! :.'- ;9.'97 - ! ' < !( - ! ( . 3;9?7 : ! !
, ,;' -;'! ( 2!- 2!( , --! A - . . '. 9 (;,, ! -97 !.<7 -
!! -A ' 2 '! ,, !'( - 2 <! - . - ;23!'( 2! - 3!
?!:- 3!, '! - ! 1( :! (; .(!( - ( ,'!D;! -97 ?!:-
- ! !E-'!2! ' !' , - ! ! 2 ' 3! - !
1( :! . - ! & ( ;9 (!! - .- !'-. '!- '! .'!
:' :!'97 (-'; -! - 2 <! - .- - ! ''! - - 2!( !. (
2;(- , ;'(! . .:- - !2(!9<!( - !E (- - (
 133
fur ther ad vancing. I f it is no t the J.D. sho uld
adjust it. J.D. takes position on 1. of Can.
5 .Dur ing P r. J.D. transfer s wand to 1 .h.,
elevates it, and shows Sn. of R.* After Pr. J.D.
sho uld withdraw K.S.[image1] to per mit S.D.
to start perambulation with Can. He then re-
places the K.S. in position before S.W.'s ped. and
resumes his seat.
6.For the Ob. the J.D. should arrive at the
W.M.'s ped. simultaneously with S.D. and Can.
He should see that the Can.'s l.a. is correctly placed
in the a...e o f the Sq., and that Can.'s t...b is
i.t.f.o.a.S., pointing over his 1.s. J.D. should hold
the Sq. with his r.h., transferring his wand to the
1.h.$ It is impossible here for the J.D. to show
the Sn. of F., but he should remember to stand to 0.
by taking the Sp. After the Ob. the J.D. removes
the Sq. and lowers Can.'s l.a. J.D. returns to his
seat without squaring.
7.On the Can.'s return to the Lodge for the Explana-
tion of the T.B. the J.D. does not accompany the S.D.
to the door. J.D. should wait till S.D. conducts
Can. to the foot of the T.B., which should be on the
floor in the centre of the Lodge ; he then takes posi-
tion on left of Can., and hands his wand to the W.M.
for use in pointing out the emblems.
T HE C E R E M O NY O F RAI S I N G
1.During this Ceremony the J.D. is again in
the position of assistant to his senior colleague.
B !! , - -! : */> > !! , - -! : *)/
!! :.'. . : */*
*)"

Immediately the Lodge is Opened or Resumed in the

Third Degree the J.D. assists the S.D. to lay the
S.* and ext. the L.'s. [image1] Upon the W.M.'s
direction for the admission of the Can. the J.D.
should attend to the as in Second Degree (see
para. 4, p. 132).
2.During the Pr. the J.D. transfers wand to his
1.h., elevates it, and shows Sn. of R. After Pr.
the J.D. should withdraw the K.S. When S.D. has
started perambulation with Can. J.D. replaces K.S.
[image2] in position before S.W.'s ped. and follows
S.D. and Can. During perambulations in this De-
gree the J.D. should keep place immediately behind the
Can., carefully squaring the Lodge at each corner.
3.After second perambulation the J.D. lines up in
the W. on Can.'s left. After W.M.'s proclamation
the J.D. again takes position behind Can. for third
perambulation.
4.After third perambulation, during presenta-
tion of Can. by the S.W., the J.D. takes place in
line with Can. and S.D., standing on the left of his
senior Officer.
5.The J.D. again follows behind the Can. when
S.D. conducts him to position for demonstration as
to method of advancing to the E. J.D. takes
B !. ( ( ;9 '!2!23!' - .- - ! 2;(- ;( open. !
( ;9 never be folded ;' . 7 :.'- , - ! !'!2 7
> ! 2;9.- ! , 2:' <!2! - 3! ,. - .
! , (-'; - - ! 1( .'! !<!' !E- - !'! !'!, '! -
(!!2( - .- - ! 2;9.- & 22 --!! . 9.7 A !E. -
';9 .( &+ - ! : - .- A it ( ;9 3! ! : (
<.'7 3;- - ! 2!- .-! :.'.' .3 <! ( - ! :'. - !
, 99 A! - ! '!.- 2.C ' -7 , '! ;9.' 2;9.- A '?
!(
N !! , - -! : E)/ O !! , - -!
 = & 135
place on left of Can. while S.D. demonstrates.
J.D. should arrive at W.M.'s ped. simultaneously
with Can. and S.D.
6.During the Ob. the J.D. transfers wand to
I .h., elevates it,* and sho ws P .Sn. o f a M.M.
Correct moment to dis. Sn. is when Can. repeats
final words of the Ob. Remember to recover.
7.When the Can. has been assisted by the W.M.
the J.D. should step back with Can. and S.D. to
foot of the C.
8 . Af ter t h e E x ho r ta ti o n, wh e n t h e W . M.
summons the Wardens to assist him, the J.D. should
wait until the S.W. arrives immediately behind him.
He then steps aside and returns to his seat at right of
the S.W.'s ped. without squaring.
* See footnote on p. 126.
 CHAPTER XVII
&

& 1 situation ( at or near

to the right o f the Worshipful Master. Unless

expressly directed otherwise by the Master he should be
careful not to interpose himself between the Chair and
any Grand Lodge Officers who may be present, those
distinguished Brethren having a prescriptive right to
occupy the seats on the immediate right of the Master.
The Senior Deacon's Jewel of Office is exactly
similar to that of his junior colleague, the Dove
bearing an Olive Branch, although it may here be men-
tioned that the emblem of both was originally the
Greek god Hermes, the herald and messenger of
the gods, represented with winged cap and an-
kles, bearing the Caduceus adorned with wings to
symbolise Speed, and entwined with a pair of ser-
pents representing Wisdom and Health.
An ancient Lodge of which the author is a Past
Master still retains the winged messenger as the
Jewel of the Senior Deacon. Many old Lodges are in
possession of similar jewels, but such figures, if lost
or destroyed, must not be replaced with a
 & *)0

replica. In any such case the authorities stipulate

that the new jewel must be the now familiar Dove
and Olive Branch.
Presuming that the newly invested Senior Deacon
has passed through the earlier Offices of Inner Guard
and Junior Deacon, obtaining well-merited pro-
motion by his diligence in the discharge of the obliga-
tions attaching to those important positions, it is
to be assumed that he has now gained some confi-
dence in his own ability and knowledge, and that he is
justified in looking forward to the further advancement
which will bring to him the proud occupancy of the
Warden's chair in the South. But the year which
must elapse is one of considerable responsibility and
labour for him if his Lodge is one in which the Cere-
monies of Passing and Raising are to be carried out
during the present Master's reign.
I t i s tr ue t hat t he S e nio r Deaco n is no t e n -
trusted with the immediate care of the Candidate
during the solemn and imposing Ceremo ny o f
Initiation, but the two subsequent Ceremonies are
not of less importance. The second stage, short
though it is in comparison with the others, is one full
of interest ; while it can scarcely be said that there is
any Masonic Ceremony more sublimely beautiful and
inspiring than that of Raising.
During each of these Ceremonies it is Brother
Senior Deacon who is personally responsible for the
conducting of the Candidate, and much will depend
upon the manner in which he fills his important role.
*)4
The final stage will first be dealt with, and detailed
directions are tabulated hereunder for the guidance
of the newly invested Senior Deacon.

T HE CE RE MO NY O F R AI SI NG
1.The S.D. has to remember that he is in charge
of the Candidate from the start, i.e. before the
Lodge is actually opened in the Third Degree.
After the W.M.'s announcement that 'Bro. A. B.
is this evening a Candidate to be . . .,' the S.D.
conducts the Can. to the W., on the 1. of the S.W.,
and stands with him facing E.* S.D. should be
ready to prompt if necessary.
2.At conclusion of Examination S.D. conducts
Can. to N. side of the W.M.'s ped. without squaring.
S.D. repeats the P.W. after the W.M., and Can.
repeats it after S.D.
3.After the Entrusting S.D. conducts Can.
straight to the W. at left of the S.W. without squaring.
Can. is directed to salute the W.M. as a F.C., first
as an E.A. He then retires, S.D. escorting him to
the door.
(The Lodge is here Opened or Resumed
in the Third Degree.)
Assisted by his junior colleague the S.D. now*
- - ! 2;9.- ! , 2:' <!2! - - ! :9. !(
&. : (- - ! before - ! 1( . ; !2! -
3;- - ! 2!- .-! :.'. ' .3 <! ( - ! :'. - !
, 99 A! - ! '!.- 2.C ' -7 , '! ;9.' 2;9.- A '?
!(
K !! :.'. + : *//
 & *)#

attends to certain matters of preparation ; he must

lay the S.* and see that the L.'s are ext.
4.The W.M. having given directions for the
Can.'s admission, the S.D. takes his wand in his
r.h. and proceeds without squaring to the door, where
he will be joined by the J.D. after the latter Officer
has attend ed to the K.S. T he S.D. sho uld b e
watchful to see that this duty is not forgotten. S.D. con-
ducts Can. to within a convenient distance from the
K.S., and directs him to advance as a F.C., first as an
E.A. S.D. must see that the Can. takes Sp. before
showing Sn. in each case.
5.Before the Pr. the S.D. should see that the
Can.'s r.h. is in correct attitude for Sn. of R. S.D.
then transfers wand to his 1.h., elevates
it,[image3] and places r.h. in correct attitude.
6.After the Pr. S.D. assists Can. to rise and
starts on the first perambulation, squaring the Lodge
carefully at each corner. Assuming that the K.S.
is one small enough to be handled conveniently by
one Officer, it should be replaced in position before
S.W .'s p ed. b y the J .D. a fter S.D. has star ted
perambulation with Can. (see para. L p. 134), but
the S.D. should remember to start the perambula-
tion very slowly, thus giving the J.D. time to replace
B ! ( ;9 not 3! , 9 ! F(!! , - -! : +)"G
K !! , - -! : *)" .( - ''! - : - .- A - !
1( ( ;9 3! !E-
N !! , - -! : *)/
O ! ' !. ( ( ;9 -! - .- - !'! .'! 97 -A
.( ( A ! - ! &. ! -!' - ! ! ( '! -! -
advance (-!. , salutei.e. A ! - ! &. ! -!'( - ! !-
2.?! advancement ,' 2 - ! *(- - - ! / ! '!! ' ,' 2 - !
/ - - ! )' ! '!! !! , - -! : */>
*40 H

the K.S. and catch him up without noticeable

hurrying. The J.D. is often seen to do something
in the nature of a sprint to overtake his senior
Officer and the Can. This looks undignified and
should be quite unnecessary. In making the three per-
ambulations with the Can. the S.D. should at all
times remember that the J.D. should be following
immediately behind the Can. S.D. should be particularly
careful when making the turning movements at the
corners of the Lodge; the movements should be
made slowly, thus allowing the J.D. to keep in
correct position without difficulty. S.D. should be
careful to bring Can. to a halt at the W.M.'s ped.
before directing him to salute the W.M. as a M.*
The Can. should not turn his head or body towards
the W.M. when giving the salute. Similar direc-
tions apply when Can. salutes the W.M. or War-
dens at a later stage. S.D. should again bring
Can. to a halt at J.W.'s station before directing him
how to advance. The S.D. should not give the
Sns. with the Can. at the Wardens' stations. (See
footnote on p. 129 for method of communicating the G.
or T.) After the examination by J.W. the S.D. must
again be careful to bring Can. to a halt at S.W.'s
ped. before directing him to salute.
7.The second perambulation follows immedi-
* - ( !((! - .9 - .9- . -.?! : 3!, '! < any .(
! ( ! , - ! ( , - ! ! '!! ;' - !
22; .- ,- ! ( !. ! '!! - ( 2:'!((! ;:
- ! &. 37 - ! - .- it is in this position that the Ss. of
the Degree are communicated.' ! position .99; ! - . 3!
.'' <! .- only by taking the Sp. 7 '! - - (.9;-! 1
:.(( 1 ( - !'!, '! '! -97 :: (! - - ! -;.9
 & *"*
ately after the first, the Can. again being brought
to a halt at the W.M.'s and J.W.'s stations to salute
as a F.C. He is then directed how to advance to
the S.W. for examination. Following this examina-
tion the Can. is placed in the W. at the 1. of the
S.W., facing E., to await the W.M.'s proclamation.
Then follows the third and last perambulation.
8.During the third perambulation the Can.
again salutes the W.M. and J.W. as a F.C., after-
wards advancing to the S.W. to communicate the
P.O. and P.W. Following this examination the
S.D. again places the Can. in the W. at the 1. of the
S.W., and places Can.'s r.h. in S.W.'s 1.h. S.D.
should see that Can. is facing E. and stand in line
on his left. S.D. should be alert to take charge of
Can. again at proper moment and stand facing E.
while receiving S.W.'s directions. No S n. wh en
addressed by S.W.
9.After directions have been given by the S.W.
the S.D. conducts Can. to proper position in the
N. to demonstrate method of advancing to the E.
S.D. should stand in front of the Can. to address
him.* The method is then demonstrated. S.D.'s
position at start is with 1.f. pointing towards the E.
and r.f. towards the S. Start with 1.f. and conclude
with four distinct Sps.
10.S.D. should remember that when the Can. is
asked by the W.M. prior to the Ob. whether he
B ' - 2;9.- :'. - ! - ! ''! - : ( - , '
A ! . '!(( - ! &. .- - ( : - ( - ! ( ! ,
- !& !'! .'! A!<!' ( 2! ! 2( ( A ! - .-
- ( :'. - ! A ;9 9 ? .A?A.' !'! .( - !' .(!(
!. ( A 99 3! A (! - ;(! 22 (! (! . . .:- - !2
(!9<!( - !E (- - (
*"/

is ' prepared to meet them . . .' he should answer volun-

tarily.* Before the commencement of the Ob. S.D.
transfers wand to his 1.h., elevates it, [image1]
takes Sp ., a nd s ho ws P .S n. o f a M. M. T he
co r r ec t moment to dis. Sn. is immediately the Can.
repeats the final words. Do not forget to recover.
11.When the Can. has been assisted by the
W.M. the S.D. should step back with Can. and
J.D. to foot of the C.
12.When the W.M. summons the Wardens to
assist him after the Exhortation the S.D. should wait
until the J.W. arrives immediately behind him, then
step aside and return to his seat without squaring.
13.After the Charge the S.D. should not leave
his seat to take position beside the Can. during the ex-
planation of the first three Sns. S.D. should
remain seated until the W.M. informs Can. that
he 'is now at liberty to retire .. ,' S.D. then con-
ducts Can. direct and without squaring to left of the
S.W. and directs him how to salute the W.M. in
the three Degrees. S.D. must remember that at
this point the Can. gives only the P.Sn. of the Third
Degree. Can. then retires, the S.D. escorting him
to the door. Certain matters of preparation are
now attended to by the S.D. and his colleague, and
the L.'s are restored.
B !! , - -! : */0 K !! , - -! : */>
N ! &. ( ;9 .9A.7( 3! :!'2 --! - 9!.<! - ! !
.- - ( (-. ! - '!(- '! 2(!9, - ( : 1( ! (9 <! 97
;(- 2 , 2:9!- - ! !'!2 7 A - ;- .99 A - ! &. -
'!- '! F - ! :'!-!E- , (.< - 2! 1G ( ! - 3! !:'! .-! 37
.99 3!9 !<!'( ' !'97 . , ! !'!2 .9
O ! ''! - (-. ! , ' '!(- ' - ! 1( ( after - ! &.
.( 9!,- - ! ! - '!(- '! 2(!9, - : &!'-. A ' (
 & *")
14.When the Can. is readmitted the S.D. meets
him at the door and conducts him to the left of the
S.W., directing him to salute the W.M. in the three De -
gr e e s. F u l l S n s . t h i s t i m e . S.D. no w p la ce s
Can.'s r.h. in S.W.'s 1.h. for presentation to W.M.
See that Can. is facing E., and stand in line with
him on his left. It is the S.W.'s duty to invest
the Can. with the distinguishing badge of a M.M.,
but the S.D. should be ready to assist if necessary.
15.After the investiture and subsequent address
the S.D. leads Can. diagonally (no squaring) to
position from twelve to eighteen inches from the
W.M.'s ped. During the T.H. the Can. should not be
moved backward and forward as stated in some printed
rituals. Such practice is contrary to Emulation-teaching.
16.S.D. must remember that the Can. should
not take the Sp. when the W.M. announces that
'one of the Brethren, looking round, observed . . S.D.
should whisper to Can. to copy the Master when
Sns. of H. and S. are given. A little later, when
the W.M. rises to demonstrate the five Sns., t he
S.D . s ho uld d ir ec t C a n. to ta ke Sp . Ca n. cop-
ies the W.M. at each Sn., but does not repeat the
words used by the W.M. when giving the Sns. of J.
& E. and G. & D.
(: ?! 37 - ! ;' - ! & .' ! !' 1 - .-
3' - 2 ' (-.' 1 .<! '!,!'! ! A .-!<!' - - ! 1(
! ; !( '.39! :'. - ! , 2. :;9.- - ! !9! -' (A - .-
- ( : - ( 3< ;(97 . 2 !' <.- ( ! (;
2!- ;9 .<! 3!! , 99 A! - ! .7( 3!, '! - ! -'
; - , !9! -' -7 , ' 9 - ! A 9! , - ! , '(- :.'- ,
- ! &!'!2 7 ( ;9 3! :!', '2! - .- (-.-! , ? (
A A! .'! -.; - - ! ' ! -;'! .99; !( - - !
,
*""

17.After explanation of the W.T.'s S.D. should con-

duct Can. straight to a seat and resume his own seat.
The Can. should not be conducted to the W. to salute
at the conclusion of the Ceremony.
T HE CE RE MO NY O F P AS SI N G
1.During the Examination and Entrusting, prior to
the Ceremony of Passing, it is the J.D. who is in
charge of the Can. S.D. has no duty to perform until
the Lodge has been opened in the Second Degree
and the W.M. orders the admission of the Can. S.D.
then takes wand in his r.h. and proceeds without squaring
to the door, where he will be joined by the J.D. after
the latter Officer has attended to the placing of the
K.S.* S.D. should be watchful to see that this duty
is not forgotten. S.D. conducts Can. to within a con-
venient distance from the K.S. and directs him to
advance as a M.-I- S.D. must see that Can, takes Sp.
before giving the Sn.
2.Before the Pr. S.D. should see that the Can.'s
r.h. is in correct attitude for Sn. of R. S.D.
transfers wand to 1.h., elevates it, [image2] and
places r.h. in correct attitude.
3.After Pr. S.D. assists Can. to rise and starts
on first perambulation, squaring each corner of the
Lodge. He should bring Can. to a halt at W.M.'s
ped. before directing him to salute as a M. Can.
must again be brought to a halt at J.W.'s ped. before he
is directed to advance. The S.D. does not give
B ! , - -! : *)L K !! , - -! : *)#
N !! , - -! : */> O !! , - -! : *"
 & *"+
the Sns. with the Can. at the Wardens' stations. (See
footnote on p. 129 for method of communicating the
G. or T.)
4.After first perambulation S.D. should place
Can. in the W. at 1. of S.W. and await W.M.'s
proclamation.
5.Second perambulation. Can. is halted at
W.M.'s and J.W.'s peds. to salute as a M., after-
wards advancing to the S.W. to communicate the
P.G. and P.W.
6.After this examination the S.D. conducts the
Can. to the l. of the S.W. and places Can.'s r.h. in
S.W.'s 1.h. S.D. should see that Can, is facing the E.
and stand in line with him on his left. Be alert to
take charge of Can. again at proper moment and
stand facing E. while receiving S.W.'s directions.
No Sn. when addressed by S. W.
7.After receiving directions from the S.W. the
S.D. conducts Can. to proper position in the N. to dem-
onstrate method of advancing to the E. S.D.
should stand in front of Can. to address him. The
method is then demonstrated. S.D.'s position at
start is with r.f. pointing towards the W. and l.f.
towards the S. Commence with l.f.
8.Before commencement of Ob. S.D. should
transfer wand to l.h., elevate it,* take Sp., and show Sn.
of F. The correct moment to dis. Sn. is when C a n .
c o mp l e t e s t h e O b . C a n . s h o u l d a n s we r volun-
tarily when asked by W.M. if he is 'willing to take
it . . t
9.After the W.M. has assisted Can. to rise the
) (( *++&,+&( +, - 0 > (( *++&,+&( +, -
*">

S.D. should place Can. at once at the right of the

W.M.'s ped. During the Entrusting the S.D. must
be ready to assist if necessary, but should not
interfere unduly.* T he S.D. does not give the
Sns. as demonstrated by the W.M. S.D. should be
quick with prompt in response to W.M.'s third question,
or the Can. may answer voluntarily and incorrectly.
When the W.M. gives the W. the S.D. repeats it to the
Can., who must repeat it after him. Similar repetition
when the W.M. spells the W.
10.After the Entrusting S.D. conducts Can. to
J.W.'s station for examination, being careful to square
the Lodge. S.D. must take Sp. and show Sn. before ad-
dressing the J.W. Dis. Sn. before J.W. replies. [im-
age1] (See para. 3, p. 520, and para. so, p. 528, re-
garding the wand.)
11.S.D. conducts Can. to S.W.'s station for
further examination. At this point the S.D. must
remember that the Can. does not give Sns. of a
F.C. when directed to advance.$ After this ex-
amination S.D. conducts Can. to l. of S.W. and
places Can.'s r.h. in S.W.'s l.h. for presentation.
S.D. should stand in line with Can. on the left.
12.It is the S.W.'s duty to invest the Can. with
the distinguishing badge of a F.C.F.M., but the
S.D. should be ready to assist if necessary. At
conclusion of the S.W.'s remarks S.D. should turn
Can. to face the E., standing in line on his right.
After W.M.'s address regarding the badge S.D.
awaits directions to conduct Can. to the S.E. corner of
the Lodge. He must be careful to remember
B !! , - -! : 4 K !! , - -! : */#
!! :.'. - : */4
 & 147
instructions to Can. at this point. The Lodge must
be squared when conducting Can. to S.E. corner.
The correct position at the S.E. corner is just in
line with the front of the W.M.'s ped.
13.S.D. should be alert to conduct Can. to
proper position at W.M.'s ped. at correct moment
for explanation of the W.T.'s.
14.When Can. is dismissed by the W.M. the
S.D. should conduct him direct, without squaring, to
the W., at the 1. of the S.W., and direct him how to
salute as a F.C., first as an E.A.* Can. then
retires, S.D. escorting him to the door. [image1]
15.On the Can.'s return the S.D. meets him at
the door and conducts him to 1. of the S.W., direct-
ing him how to salute as a F.C., first as an E.A.
S.D. now conducts Can. to foot of the T.B., which
should be on the floor in the centre of the Lodge.
After the Lecture on the T.B. the S.D. conducts
Can. to a seat and resumes his own seat. The Can.
should not be taken to the W. to salute after Ex-
planation of the T.B.
T H E C E R E M O N Y O F I N I T I AT I O N
1.The S.D. is now in the position of assistant to
his junior Brother the Junior Deacon.$ Before the
admission of the Can, the S.D. should see that
J !! :.'. + : *//
K ! &. ( ;9 .9A.7( 3! :!'2 --! - 9!.<! - ! !
.- - ( (-. ! - '!(- '! 2(!9, - ( : 1( ! (9 <! 97
;(- 2 , < - ! ! -;'! - ! A - ;- .99 A
- ! &. - '!- '! F - ! :'!-!E- , (.< - 2! 1G ( ! - 3!
!:'! .-! 37 .99 3!9 !<!'( ' !'97 . , ! !'!2 .9 !!
:.'. . : */>
*"4

the K.S. is in position. The S.D. does not square

the Lodge when leaving his post at the right of the
W.M. to attend to the K.S.* Having attended to
this duty he joins the J.D. at the door to receive
the Can.
2.During the Pr. the S.D. should transfer his
wand to the l.h., elevate it, [image1] and show Sn. of R.
Immediately the J.D. has assisted Can. to rise the
S.D. should draw the K.S. aside* and stand in line
with J.D. and Can. during the W.M.'s proclamation. The
K.S. should be replaced in its position before the
S.W.'s ped. directly the J.D. has started with the
Can. to perambulate the Lodge. S.D. should then
take the p.n...d from the S.W.'s ped. (where the
I.G. should have placed it), proceed to the E., place
p.n...d on W.M.'s ped., and resume his seat. It is
the duty o f the S.D. a n d n o t of th e I.G. to take the
p.n...d to the W.M.$
3.When the J.D. conducts the Can. to the E. by
the three irreg. sps. the S.D. should arrive there simulta-
neously.
4.Before the Ob. the S.D. should assist Can.
by raising his l.h. at the W.M.'s reference to the
C.'s. Similarly he should lower Can.'s l.h. when the
C.'s have been removed at the conclusion of the Ob.
During the Ob. S.D. should transfer wand to his
l.h.., elevate take Sp., and sho w P .Sn. o f an
E.A. The correct moment to dis. Sn. is when the
C a n . c o mp l e t e s t h e Ob . Af t e r t h e W . M . h a s
assisted Can. the S.D. resumes his seat.
B !! , - -! : *// K !! , - -!
N !! , - -! : #+
 CHAPTER XVIII

As in the case o f the Chaplain, Almo ner, and

certain other Officers of the Lodge, so with Brother Di-
rector of Ceremonies; he is not, according to the
Constitutions, a regular Officer, but one of the per-
missive Officers who may be appointed at the will
of the Worshipful Master.
It is to be assumed that in the great majority of
Lodges such an appointment is always made when a
competent Brother is available, ready and willing to
undertake the important duties appertaining to the Office
; for it may truthfully be said that a thoroughly efficient
Director of Ceremonies is a boon and a blessing to
the Master, and indeed to the Lodge as a whole.
There are a few (fortunately only a very few)
Brethren who seem ever ready to disparage the
Office of Director of Ceremonies, Brethren who are
wont to adopt a rather lofty attitude of superior
criticism towards Directors of Ceremonies. Per-
chance the reason for this peculiar attitude lies in
the fact that at the Emulation Lodge of Improve-
ment there is no Director of Ceremonies. The
155
reason for the absence of a D.C. at Emulation
Lodge of Improvement is simple to understand.
Emulation claims to work the Ceremonies exactly as
they were settled by the Lodge of Reconciliation i n
1 8 16 and to have p er mi tted no chan ges o r in-
novations during the passing of the years; and in
1816 there was no such Officer as a Director of
Ceremonies in a private Lodge.
The first Grand Director of Ceremonies was
Bro. Sir George Naylor (Garter-King-at-Arms),
who was appointed in 1814, immediately after the
Union, and held the Office until 1831. In 1832 he
was succeeded by Bro. Sir William Woods (Garter-
King-at-Arms), who officiated until 1840. From
1841 till 1859 the Office was held by Bro. Richard
Jennings, who was followed from 186o to 1904 by
Bro. Sir Albert Woods, G.C.V.O., K.C.B., K.C.M.G.
(Garter-King-at-Ar ms). Bro. Frank Richardson
followed in 1904 and officiated till 1912. He was in that
year succeeded by Bro. J. S. Granville Grenfell,
who held the Office till 1926. Bro. Grenfell was
succeeded by Bro. Lieut.-Col. C. R. I. Nicholl who
held the office till 1939 when Bro. Lieut-Col. P. C.
Bull succeeded him.
Bro. Bull remained in office till 1951, although in
1942 Bro. C. F. Cumberledge was appointed for the
one year only, Bro. Frank W. R. Douglas succeeded
Bro. Bull and is still holder of the office.
Prior to 1915 the Grand Director of Ceremonies
ranked below the Assistant Grand Superintendent
 !

of Works, and in private Lodges the D.C.'s position in

the table of precedence was immediately after the Junior
Deacon. At the Quarterly Communication of Grand
Lodge held on 3rd March 1915 a message was re-
ceived from the M.W. the Grand Master, stating
that he was pleased to recommend that the holder
of the Office of Grand Director of Ceremonies
should rank and take precedence immediately after Past
Presidents of the Board of Benevolence, and sho uld
b e entitled to the prefix o f ' Ver y Worshipful.'
At the follo wing Quarterly Co mmunication of
Grand Lodge, held on 2nd June 5915, Bro. Sir
Alfred Robbins, President of the Board of General
Purposes, moved the necessary resolution for the
requisite amendments to the Boo k of Con stitu -
tion s, which amend ments made provision for the
Director of Ceremo nies in a p r i vat e Lo d g e to
r an k i m me d i ate l y a f ter t he Secretary.
In private Lodges, as has been stated, there was
no such Officer as D.C. in 1816, and the Office was
not introduced until some years later. Therefore,
the Office is non-existent at the Emulation Lodge of
Improvement, and during the Installation Cere-
mony the duties usually falling to the lot of the
D.C. are discharged by the Installing Master. At
the Lodge of Improvement, of course, the Installa-
tion Ceremony is always conducted by an expert
Past Master, one who is thoroughly conversant with
Emulation practice and who knows exactly what to
*+/
do ; consequently the Ceremony proceeds smoothly
and without a hitch.
Whether the same conditions would prevail in a pri-
vate Lodge adopting similar practice is open to consid-
erable doubt. In a few regular Lodges which insist
upon following slavishly the exact method of the
Emulation Lodge of Improvement, and work the
Installation Ceremony without a D.C., the pre-
sent writer has more than once witnessed un-
dignified confusion and uncertainty, which would un-
doubtedly have been prevented by the presence of a
competent Director of Ceremonies.
Like all other Officers of the Lodge, the Director
of Ceremonies acts under the direct authority of
the Master; yet the very natur e o f his Office
demands that he must be permitted to a great
extent to establish his own methods of procedure in
the discharge of his many responsibilities. The
D.C. may be regarded as the Master's adjutant and, as
such, he is of necessity vested with considerable author-
ity; but he should bear in mind that every Office in
the Lodge is an annual appointment, and that, with
the exception of the Treasurer and the Tyler, the
Master is free to appoint whomsoever he pleases. It is
to be presumed, however, that the efficient Director
of Ceremonies will be reappointed year after year, and
that he will gradually become what may be co n-
sidered one of the p erm a n en t officials.* Fortunate
indeed is the Lodge which, in
B !! , - -! : **)
 & & *+)

its Director of Ceremonies, has found the `right man in

the right place.'
The qualifications desirable for the Office are
ma n y a nd var ied . I t i s es se n tia l t h at B r o t her
Director of Ceremonies should be an expert in
the Ritual of all the Ceremonies; he must be a
master of such matters as Masonic Etiquette and Juris-
prudence; he should be thoroughly conversant with
the co ntents o f the Bo o k o f Co n s titu tio n s. - is
advisable, too, that he should have a commanding
presence, combined with a gentle, courteous d emea n -
o ur , b ecause he, mo r e than an y o ther Officer
of the Lodge, may need to exercise the ` ma i l e d
f i s t ' c o n c e a l e d wi t h i n t h e s o f t e s t o f velvet
gloves.
Without doubt the efficient Director of Cere-
monies mu st be a Past Master, for his services
(possibly his advice) will be needed during the
esoteric portions of the Installation Ceremony. It
has to be remembered, too, that occasions will arise
when this important Officer must speak with the
voice of authority; that authority must of neces-
sity be lessened if he be not a Past Master in the
Craft.
The above are 3;- a few of the qualifications
required in an efficient Director of Ceremonies; the
Brother possessed of them will undoubtedly win
the respect and regard, and consequently the ready obe-
dience, of his younger Brethren.
It has to be borne in mind that none can lay down
*+"

hard-and-fast rules in relation to the Director of Cere-

monies and his methods in discharging the duties
of his Office ; much must be dependent upon Lodge
customs; and much, as has already been. sug-
gested, must be left to individual discretion. That
which is favoured by one Director of Ceremo nies
may be fro wned upo n b y another ; but neither
would be justified in condemning the methods of the
other as wrong.
The newly appointed Director of Ceremonies
can only aspire to attain the degree of confident
efficiency possessed by his elder Brethren in the
school of practical experience, but it is hoped that he
may derive assistance from the following general hints
which are offered for his guidance.
 !!
GENERAL HINT S FOR T HE DIRECT OR
OF CEREMONIES
1.Before the Lodge is Opened.
The D.C. should make a point of early arrival at
all Lodge Meetings; at least a quarter of an hour
before the time stated on the Summons. However
expert the Tyler may be, he may make some error
in setting out the Lodge. The D.C. should satisfy
himself that all is in order. If there is a Ceremony to
be worked the D.C. should see that the C.'s or Sq.
are ready at the W.M.'s ped. He should see that
the I.G.'s implements are in their place; that the
columns are correctly placed, etc., etc.
In the anteroom Bro. Tyler will probably see
that the Brethren sign the Attendance Book, but the
D.C. should give an eye to this.
The D.C. should ascertain if all the Officers are
present. If there are absentees he will probably be
able to suggest efficient substitutes to the Master.
Sharp on time, if the Master and his Officers are
ready, the D.C. should see that Brethren who are
not in Office enter the Lodge.
2.Masonic Clothing, Jewels, etc.
It is the D.C.'s duty to see that Brethren are
properly clothed. White gloves should always be
worn with evening dress, and the apron worn under
the coat. With morning dress or dinner jackets the
apron is worn over the coat. White gloves should
be worn on all occasions, but some Lodges do not
insist upon them.. In a Craft Lodge no jewels are permis-
sible save those appertaining to Craft or Royal Arch
Masonry.
56
3.---Processions into the Lodge.*
The usual procedure for the procession in London
Lodges is as follows :
D.C.
J.D. S.D.
J.W. S . W .
W. M .
Past Grand Stewards.
Grand Officers
(Juniors Leading).
A.D.C.
If other Brethren take part in the procession it has to
be remembered that in London Lodges a Brother of
London Rank takes precedence of a Provincial or
J !' :' !(( ( .'! ( 2!- 2!( , '2! 2 '! :.'- ;
9.'97 ' < .9 !( - ( -; 22 . ' < .9
! , ' all the Brethren - -.?! :.'- - ! :' !(( .9
! -'7 (; .(!( - ! , 99 A ' !' ( ,-! . :-! P
!23!'( , - ! ! - ,, ! F=; '( '(-G , 99 A! 37
P
8(- '!- '! F=; '( , '(-G
79!'
-!A.' -!A.'
&
((- ! 92 !'
! '!-.'7 '!.(;'!'
& .:9.
J.W.
'. ,, !'( F=; '( 9!. G
; :' !(( ( A!<!' .'! '.'!97 (!! - ! !-' : 9 -.
.'!. 9- ; ,!A , E! ';9!( . 3! (-.-! 2; 3!
!:! ! - ;: ! ' 9 .9 ;(- 2( 7!- - 2.7 (.,!97 3!
(. - .- .99 inward :' !(( ( - ! ';9! ( ;9 3! juniors
first, A - !'-. !E !:- ( A !'! . ' - !' 37 < '-;! , (
:.'- ;9.' ,, ! -.?!( . !'-. : ( - - ! :' !((
 & & *57

District Grand Officer. In Provinces and Districts

the position is reversed.
The D.C. leads the procession and at the entrance t o
t h e L o d g e g i v e s t h e c o m ma n d : 'T o o r d e r ,
Brethren, to receive the Worshipful Master and his War-
dens.' *
Slow march to the N.E. Ranks open out and
Deacons elevate their wands to form an arch beneath
which the W.M. passes and is handed to his seat
by the D.C. The ranks close in and proceed, the
Grand Officers dropping out to take their places.
The Deacons again elevate wands at the J.W.'s
station, and he passes through and is handed to his
seat by the D.C. Similarly at the S.W.'s station.
At this point the J.D. drops out to take his place at
the right of the S.W. D.C. proceeds up the N. with
S.D., the A.D.C. following behind. If the Treasurer, Sec-
retary, etc., take part in the procession it is customary
for them to fall out to take their respective places as
the procession moves on after the Master has been
handed to his seat by the D.C. The D.C. and A.D.C.
are the last to take their stations. [image1]
There are some experienced Directors of Cere-
monies, more particularly in the Provinces, who
disagree with the advice here given that in the
B * :' !(( ( ;9 . 7 ' - !' 3! :!'2 --! -
-!'<! ! between - ! .(-!' . ( .' ! (
- :.'- ;9.' : ( - - ! ! ( .99 --! - - ! & '
& - ! Constitutions, ( - . - 3! .' ;! - .- . 7
:.'- ;9.' ;(- 2 ( ! - !' ' - ' A' ' - ! (.?! ,
<! ! ! - (!!2( - .- - ! (! ' ,, !' .- . 7 '.-!
( ;9 3! (!.-! ( 2!A !'! - ! < -7 , - ! .(-!' - (
!D;.997 <! ! - - .- - ! & . & ( ;9 ;:7 . C
(!.-( .( - ! , '2!' 2.7 .<! - <! ( (( (-. - (-'; - (
;' - ! !<!
*+4
processional entry the W.M. and his Wardens
should precede the Grand Officers, their argument
being that, as the rule for inward processions is
juniors first, then the W.M., being senior to all
other Brethren in his own Lodge, should be behind
the Grand Officers. There is reason in the argu-
ment, and theoretically perhaps it is correct; but
th eo r y ma y so me t i me s b e s ub o r d i nat ed wi t h
advantage to convenience and circumstances.
In a private Lodge there are obvious objections to
the Grand Officers preceding the W.M. In the event
of a lengthy procession so arranged, the W.M., of
course, passes through the avenue formed by the Grand
Officers, and, when he has taken his place, the Grand
Officers at the rear of the procession turn inward and
proceed to their positions at the right of the Mas-
ter's chair. The Wardens are thus left stranded
somewhere in the West, perhaps for quite an appre-
ciable period, and the D.C. must either go and fetch
them or beckon them forward.
While the present writer does not for one moment pre-
sume to suggest that those who differ from his opin-
ion are wrong, yet, from a fairly long and varied experi-
ence, he believes that the procedure he advocates
avoids confusion, and results in a smoother and
more dignified entry than the contrary practice.
4.Seating of Grand Lodge Officers.
Grand Officers should be seated on the right of
the Master in their order of seniority. The D.C.
should memorise the table of precedence as set out in
the Book of Constitutions. He should also be able
to tell the badges of Grand Officers at a glance.
 159
An acting Grand Officer of the year takes precedence
over a Past Grand Officer of similar rank ; but no
acting Grand Officer takes precedence over a Past
Grand Officer of higher rank.
5.General Seating.
The seats to the E. of the Secretary's table and
the J.W.'s ped. are sometimes filled up early by
M.M.'s. This should not be permitted if Brethren
of higher rank are present or expected to arrive
later.
6.Entry of Grand Lodge Officers after the Lodge is
Open.
The D.C. should receive the distinguished visitor at
the door, giving the order, ' To Order, Brethren,'
when the Brethren rise in their places.* D.C. con-
ducts the Grand Officer to a seat at the right of the
W . M. a n d t h e n g i v e s t h e o r d er , ' B e s e a te d ,
Brethren.' Although in his own Lodge the Master is su-
preme, it is an act of courtesy for him to rise and
offer his hand in greeting to the distinguished visi-
tor.
7.Reception of other Visitors after Lodge is Open.
T he D.C. or A.D.C. sho uld see that visiting
Brethren are comfortably seated according to their
rank. A Brother of London or Provincial or District
Rank should not have to search around for a seat
and perhaps be crowded away in a back row.
J 2. 7 !( - ! ;(- 2 :'!<. 9( , ' - ! !. ( - 3!
' !'! - - ! ' ;: - ! .'' <.9 , . (- ; ( !
< (- ' !7 - ! !( '- - ! < ( - ' - !' - - ! - !
- !' -. ( 99!. ;! - ! 9!,- ; ;(- 2 (
'.'! A!<!' !-' : 9 -. !(
16o
8.Late Arrivals generally.
When the Lodge is getting crowded the D.C.
should be alert to note where there are vacant seats. It
is embarrassing for a visiting Brother arriving late and
possibly during an important Ceremonynot to be
able to find a seat. Whatever the visitor's Masonic rank
the D.C. should be alert to assist him in finding a seat.
9.Visitors from Foreign Constitutions.
There is always the possibility of a Brother arriving as
a Visitor from a Lodge under the jurisdiction of a for-
eign Grand Lodge, and doubt may arise as to
whether he may be admitted. The greatest care is essen-
tial! No Brother may be admitted unless he be a
member of a Lodge working under a Grand Lodge
recognised by the United Grand Lodge of England.
10.Salutes to Grand Officers.
Such salutes are best given in the highest Degree in
which the Lod ge is to b e opened . I f in the
Third Degree, then with the G. or R. Sn. It is a
common error to salute with the G. or R. Sn. in the
First or Second Degree. This is absolutely wrong.
The correct salutes to Grand Officers within the
Lodge are as follows:
M.W.G.M. or M.W.ProG.M. .
R.W.D.G,M. 9
R.W. Brethren . 7
V.W. Brethren . 5
Other Grand Officers . 3
 & & * 6*

* Provincial Grand Officers:

R . W . P r o v . G . M . . 7
W. Dep. Prov. G.M. (in their own Province) 5
W. Asst. Prov. G.M. (in their own Province) 5
Other Prov. Grand Officers (in their own Province). 3
No Brother while acting in a higher Office may
receive a salute other than that to which he is
personally entitled.
Having ascertained the wishes of the W.M., and de-
cided upon the convenient time for the salute, the
D.C. gives the order: 'To order, Brethren,' or Upstand-
ing, Brethren,' when the Brethren rise. D.C. pro-
ceeds: 'By command of the W.M. I call upon you
to salute the Grand Lodge Officers with t h r e e ,
t a k i n g t h e t i m e f r o m m e ! T o o r d e r , Br eth-
r en!' T he salute is then given. After the salute
the D.C. says: Be seated, Brethren.' The se nio r
Gr a nd O f fi cer t he n ac k n o wled g es t h e greeting.
(NOTE.This is, of course, assuming that all the
Grand Officers present are below the rank of Grand
Inspector.)
11.Ceremonial Address.
T he present and past Grand Masters and the
present and past Pro Grand Masters are entitled to
the appellation of Most Worshipful' (M.W.). The
present and past Deputy Grand Masters, the present
and past Provincial and District Grand Masters, and
the present and past Grand Wardens of Grand Lodge
are entitled to the prefix Right Worshipful' (R.W.).
B ! -.39! , (.9;-!( - ' < .9 '. ,, !'( .::9 !(
.9( - (-' - '. ,, !'(
*>/

The present and past Grand Chaplains, present and

past Grand Treasurers, present and past Grand
Registrars, present and past Deputy Grand Regis-
trars, present and past Presidents of the Board
o f General P urp o ses, present and p ast Gr and
Secretaries, present and past Presidents of the Board
of Benevolence, present and past Grand Directors
of Ceremonies, and the present and past Grand
Inspectors are entitled to the prefix 'Very Wor-
shipful' (V.W.). The address of ' Worshipful ' (W.)
is used by the rest of the Grand Officers, present
and past, and by the present and past Masters of
Lodges. All other Brethr en are designated as '
Brother' only.
12.Masonic Applause.
The only form of Masonic applause permissible
is a single clap, but even this is better omitted unless the
custom of the Lodge and the wishes of the W.M. ordain
otherwise. In any case it should only be given on
the command of the D.C., who should stand and
let his hands be seen by all, so that the clap may be
simultaneous.
13.Salutes and Greetings.
At the Emulation Lodge of Improvement the
salutes (or greetings) given during the Installation
Ceremony or to Grand Officers are given very
audibly. The theory advanced is that there is a
difference between 'salutes' and ' greetings 'that all
salutes should be silent, while all greetings should be
audible and hearty. There may be much in the
theory, but the fact remains that audible and noisy
salutes are frowned upon by the Officials of Grand
 163
Lodge, as may be seen at any Consecration Meeting.
Directors of Ceremonies must use their own discre-
tion as to whether they accept the theory advanced by
the Committee of Emulation Lodge of Improvement
or whether they prefer to bow to the example of the
Grand Director of Ceremonies and his Deputies.*
14.When Opening the Lodge in the Second or
Third Degree.
Possibly the W.M. may omit to request E.A.'s or
F.C.'s to retire. The D.C. should be on the alert to
see that this is always done.
15.Prompting in Lodge.
All prompting in Lodge should be avoided unless it
be essential ; but the occasion may arise when
both the W.M. and the I.P.M. are at a loss. It is
the D.C. who should be able to supply the necessary
cue quietly and as unobtrusively as possible.
B ! :;39 .- , - ! , '(- ! - , - ( . ;.9 - !
(-.-!2! - .( 3!! A !97 ' ;9.-! - .- - ! 9.-! 8
' '. < 99! '! ,!99 F & , ' , ;'-!! 7!.'(G not
,.< ;' - ! ( 9! - 2!- , < - ! (.9;-!( ! .;- ' .(
- !'!, '! 3!! .- ( 2! -' ;39! - :9. ! - ! 2.--!' 3!7 .99
(:;-! . .( 3!! 22; .- - 97 A - - ! :'!
(! - '. '! - ' , &!'!2 !( 3;- .9( A - - !
'!- '! A ,, .-! .( ! : ;- 7 '. '! - '( ,
&!'!2 !( ;' ' '! ,!991( 9 :!' , ,, ! ,
- ! :.(- 1( , & 1( 97 ! F. ' - !' A ,, .-!
( E-!! 7!.'( . . ='+ ( . :.(- '! !:- ' , . '! (!
2;9.- A '? G (-.-!( - .- ! ,.< ;'( - ! .; 39!
(.9;-! . - .( - 3! -! - .- !<! - ( ' - !' !( not (;
!(- - .- ! A.( !<!' '! -! - , 99 A (; 2!- 37 - !
& ! - !' '!- '! !' ! 9; - ! :'!
(! - & (!!2 D; -! ; . 2 ;( - !' : - .- - !
9.-! ' '! ,!99 ,.< ;'! - ! ( 9! - (.9;-! . '! -! (
!:;- !( - <! - - .- 2. !'
*>"
16.The D.C.'s Wand.
In Lodge the D.C. should not move about without
his wand. Many expert D.C.'s are able to give all
Sns. and salutes without relieving themselves of
their wands, but if in certain cases the D.C. feels
that he must put his wand aside temporarily when
salutes are to be given, then he should place it in its
stand. To surrender the wand to another's keeping,
even for a few minutes, looks, to say the least of it, ama-
teurish and undignified.
17.Proving unknown Visitors.
In the event of an unknown visitor requesting
admission it will probably fall to the lot of the D.C. to
' prove ' him. He should always be prepared to dis-
charge this duty in a thorough manner. It can never
be too thorough.
18.The Installation Ceremony.
The D.C. should conduct the P.M.'s who are to
occupy the positions of S.W., J.W., and I.G.
After the opening of the Lodge in the Second
Degree the D.C. p resents the Master - Elect.
Remember NOT Worshipful Master-Elect.*
It is a good plan for the D.C. to arrange with
the Tyler that when the M.M.'s are readmitted to
the Lodge the Visiting Brethren are requested by
the Tyler to enter first, the Members waiting behind
for a few moments. The Visitors having entered
the Lodge and taken their seats, [image1]- the Members
can
B !'! 3! & .- - ! 2;9.- ! , 2:' <!
2! - - ( ;-7 ( ( .' ! 37 - ! F !! : 1"# G
, - 2;9.- ! , 2:' <!2! - - !'! ( no salute
37 - ! '!- '! A ! '! ! -!' - ! ! .- - ( : -
3;- - 2;(- 3! '!2!23!'! - .- 2;9.- ,. - . !
 & & 165
then enter and be marshalled in the North by the
D.C. or A.D.C. for the perambulation, without
trouble or confusion.
T he D.C. sho uld r eme m b er to attend to the
changing of the T.B.'s when there is no longer a
J.D. available to do it.
When the M.M.'s are ordered to retire the D.C.
should see that any Officers who are leaving the
Lodge leave their collars on their seats.*
According to the Emulation system the Brethren do
not salute when ordered to retire from the Lodge. A
reason for the absence of the salute which the
author has heard advanced by one of Emulation's
senior and most experienced Preceptors is that,
directly the W.M. requests the Brethren to retire, it
is the I.G.'s duty to open the door. Therefore, the
door being open, the Lodge is not properly
t yled , a nd no Ma so ni c S n. s ho u ld b e s ho wn .
Quite sound reasoning.
, (-'; - . - .- - !'! ( 9 --9! ,,!'! ! , . 7 3!-A!!
(4;($1 . 8 ( - '( $ .- 2;9.- 8 ( - '( .( . 2.--!' ,
,. - -.?! :.'- - ! :!'.23;9.- 9- ; , ' - ! (.?!
, <! ! ! ( 2! , - ! '!- '! .- 2;9.- .'! :!'2 --!
- 3! (!.-! '! ! -!' - ! ! - ( assumed - .- all are
%;+8& - :.(( ' ; - ! ! - (.9;-! - ! ! '!, '! - !
'! - ' ! no t (. 9;- ! '! ! -' 7 * . ! ;9.' ! - !
(.2! - ( - :'!<. 9 $ ;(- 2 -.-!( 2 (-
!( - .- 8 ( - '!- '! :' !! - - ! ' (!.-( . .'!
!E ;(! ,' 2 -.? :.'- - ! :!'.23;9.- . - ! D;!(
- .' (!( P ;9 - !7 (.9;-! I ! .;- ' <! -;'!( -
. (A!' - ! D;!'7 A - . ; !( -.- .,, '2.- <! .9- ; !
A.7 D;!(- ( - ! :' :' !-7 , - ! :' ! ;'! .- 2;9.
- ! - ( .- - ! ! , *2:' <!2! - . .
'! ;9.' ! .'! .( (-.-! D; -! ,,!'! -
J ! .( no power - ! 9.'! 99 ,, !( 8. . - 1
!! :.'. . - ". %,5 -%$% !. : /*4
*>>

During the Closings in Third and Second Degrees

the D.C. should keep an eye on the emblems on the
V.S.L. It is quite possible that the newly invested
I.P.M. may forget to attend to them.
Where there is a capable A.D.C. who is a P.M. it
is sometimes the custom for him to head the
column for each perambulation when the M.M.'s,
F.C.'s, and E.A.'s pass round the Lodge to salute
the W.M. When this custom is adopted it is the
D.C. who should give the greetings from the S.E.
corner of the Lodge. The Brethren should not be
directed to salute the W.M. 'in passing.' *
In Emulation-working there is no squaring of the Lodge
when the D.C. conducts the newly invested Officers to
their stations. [image1] In most other systems the
Lodge is so squared. [image2]
The D.C. should on no account omit to conduct
the Tyler to and from the W.M.'s ped. with the same
courtesy extended to other Officers of the Lodge.
19.Procession out of the Lodge.
In the majority of London Lodges it is customary in
the outgoing procession for the W.M. to precede his
Wardens. The order for a short procession is as
follows:
B !! , - -! : *"
- ,-!' !( '- - ! !A97 <!(-! .' ! ( . * -
- ! ' '!(:! - <! (-.- ( - ! & ( ;9 '!2!23!' - ; -- !
1( A .<! 3!! . - .( -!2: '.'7 ,, !'( - (!.-(
. ' . ! A - - ! ' '. ?
!! & .:-!' 8 1 D;.' - ! !1
O ( ( -( ! 37 - ! .- - ! 2;9.- ! ,
2:' <!2! - A (!!2( . ; , '-; .-! 2 (( ,
,'.-!' .9 .--! - - . ,, !' A ( ! - ! 9!(( A '- 7 ,
;'-!(7 3! .;(! ! .::! ( - 3! . !'< ' - !'
 & & 167
A . D . C .
J.D. S . D .
W. M .
.W. S . W .
Grand Officers
(Seniors First).
Past Grand Stewards.
O f fi cer s o f Lo nd o n R a n k.
Prov. or Dist. Grand Officers.*
P.M .'s.
D.C.
Many Provincial Lodges favour longer processions. A
safe rule to follow for outgoing processions is
Seniors First.
Either immediately before the procession leaves
the Lodge, or in the anteroom (according to
custom), it is usual for the D.C. to announce the
W.M.'s commands as to whether the Brethren are to
Dine in Collars,' etc.
20.At Refreshment.
The D.C. should be early in the dining-room and
keep a watchful eye on the arrangements to see that
all Brethren are comfortably accommodated and
seated according to their rank. At Refreshment, as
at Labour, due observance should be paid to
Masonic etiquette. Grand Lodge Officers and other
J ' < !( ' (-' -( ' < .9 ' (-' - '.
,, !'( -.?! :'! ! ! ! <!' ,, !'( , . ?
K & 3' ( ;: '!.' , - ! :' !(( - 3! ( ;-7 -
(!! - .- .99 - !'( -.?! - ! ' ''! - : ( - (
, - ! 3. D;!- 3! !9 . 3; 9 - !' - . - .-
A - ! ! !!- ( !9 .( &9 - 2.7 - 3!
A ' ; 9!(( 37 (:! (.-
*>4

distinguished guests should (unless amicable arrange-

ments be made to the contrary) be seated strictly
according to their seniority. Similar considerations
should also be observed when calling upon them for
responses - toasts.
Lack of space forbids that the foregoing list should -
be extended, and this chapter must close with a final
reminder to Brother Director of Ceremonies that his
Office is essentially one of command. He should re-
member to combine firmness and dignity with tact and
gentleness. All commands should be given distinctly,
but without undue shouting; to be too loud is to risk
conveying a hint of arrogance.
A quiet dignity in the execution of his duties
earns the Director of Ceremonies respect and
obedience. He should ever be careful to remember
that the Worshipful Master reigns supreme ; there
should never be the slightest suggestion that the
Director of Ceremonies is endeavouring to rule the
Lodge.
All men do well to hold a high ideal ever before
them, and the newly invested Director of Ceremonies
cannot do better than attend the Quarterly Com-
munications of Grand Lodge, there to study the
methods of the Grand Director of Ceremonies,
V.W. Bro. C. R. I. Nicholl. It was the present
writer's good fortune to receive many invaluable
hints fro m the late V.W. Br o. J . S. Gr anville
Grenfell, who held the Office of Grand Director of
Ceremonies from 1912 until 1926, a revered Brother
 & & *>#

who combined courtly bearing with gentle firmness,

and one who surely raised his responsible Office to
the highest possible heights of dignified efficiency. Need-
less to say, his distinguished successor worthily upholds
that standard. Directors of Ceremonies cannot do
better than strive to attain a modicum of his knowl-
edge and ability.
 CHAPTER XIX

would be difficult to over-estimate the importance at-

taching to the Office of Brother Secretary, whose station
is in the North, and whose distinctive Jewel is 'two
pens in saltire.' The ceremonial address delivered
to him by the Master upon his investiture comprises a
meagre two dozen words. In some Lodges it is
extended slightly, Brother Secretary being reminded
that his Office is 'one of considerable importance.'
The Emulation Ritual, however, omits this reminder,
possibly on the grounds that the Brother who has to
shoulder so many responsibilities is fully aware of
the importance attaching thereto.
Only once during the year is the Secretary called
upon by virtue of his Office to take any part in the
ceremonial proceedings of the Lodgeat the Installation
Meeting when he calls the attention of the Master-
Elect to the Ancient Charges and Regulations. Yet the
Secretary is, without doubt, the hardest worked of
all the Officers.
If there be younger Brethren inclined at times to
speak rather thoughtlessly of Brother Secretary
 bossing ' the Lodge let them pause for quiet
reflection. Let them ponder upon the smoothness
and dispatch with which the Lodge meetings pro-
ceed; the certainty and readiness with which helpful
advice is instantly forthcoming when the Master finds
himself in any doubt or difficulty; the regularity with
which all members receive their Lodge Summons
and other communications; the arrangements made
for their comfort during Refreshment; the happy suc-
cess of the Ladies' Festival or annual Summer Outing.
Let them ponder over these and many other mat-
ters and ask themselves to whom their thanks are
due.
That the Secretary should be an experienced
Past Master goes without saying; he will, in the
course of his duties, have to deal with many matters re-
quiring knowledge which a young and inexperi-
enced Brother cannot be expected to possess.
In a Lodge which is fortunate enough to have in
its Scribe a popular and experienced Past Master
who has the interests of the Lodge at heart, the
Brethren are not likely to desire to see any change
ma d e i n t h e o c c up a n c y o f t h e O f f i c e . H e n c e
Br other Secr etar y is, mor e o ften than no t, re-
appointed from year to year, and generally regarded
as the ' permanent official' of the Lodge.* This
fact, however, gives him no right to reappointment.
Theoretically, at any rate, he holds his Office for
but one year; he is, in common with all the Officers,
/ (( *++&,+&( +, -
*0/

subordinate to the Master who appointed him ; and

the next Master is at perfect liberty to displace him
without giving reasons for so doing. Such a con-
tingency, however, is unlikely if the Secretary be
the right man in the right place, as, happily, he so
often is.
Obviously one of Brother Secretary's most im-
portant duties is the recording in the Minute Book of
such of the proceedings at the Lodge Meetings as
are proper to be written. Experience alone can
teach him how best to chronicle those proceedings in
a manner which combines desirable brevity with satis-
factory completeness of record.
An infringement of the Constitutions for which Secre-
taries are sometimes responsible, even in these enlight-
ened days, is the omission from the Minute Book of
the names of all the Brethren present. One often hears
Brother Secretary read the names of the Master, Offi-
cers, and Visitors, and add : " . . . and the Brethren
whose names are duly recorded in the Attendance
Book." Such a practice is a direct violation of
the Constitutions. By permission of the Master a
long list of names may be 'taken as read,' but Rule
144, Book of Constitutions, definitely states that the
Secretary must enter in the Minutes : "The names of
all members present at each meeting of the Lodge,
together with those of all visiting Brethren, with
their Lodges and Masonic rank."
At each Regular Lodge Meeting the Minutes of
the last Regular Meeting, together with those of any
 173
intervening Emergency Meetings, should be read
by the Secretary and, if duly confirmed, signed by
the Master. Minutes cannot be confirmed at an
Emergency Meeting ; such a meeting is called for a
distinct, emergent purpose, which must be clearly
stated in the Summons, and no other business may
be entered upon. (See Rule 140, B. of C.*)
The question of the confirmation (or non-
confir mation) o f the Minutes is one which, at
various times and in various places, has given rise to
much discussion and argument. Actually, the only
question at issue is as to the accuracy of record. [im-
age1] If the Minutes contain an accurate record of the
proceedings they should be confirmed, although, be it
noted, the confirming of the Minutes does not ipso
facto legalise all the proceedings referred to
therein. Acceptance of the Minutes, then, merely
signifies that Brother Secretary has accurately
recorded the happenings at the meeting to which
they refer.
There are some matters, of course, which, by
their very nature, or perhaps in compliance with
the Lodge By-Laws, require confirmation at a
s ub seq ue n t mee ti n g. S u ch ma tt er s s ho uld b e
made the subject of a separate motion set out on
the Agenda. If, during the interval between one
meeting and another, Brethren have changed their
minds, their procedure is to vote against the motion
B !! :.'. > : /"* . : /)* ; !' @ ! ( ( @,
!! & .:-!' 8 : /*)
*0"

to confirm the previous resolution. On the other

hand, any matter which is in itself complete, and
does not require a confirmatory vote, cannot be
vetoed by any mere non-confirmation of the Minutes. In
such a case any alteration must be effected by a
fresh substantive motion, of which notice must be
given, to rescind the previous resolution.
T here is an instance on record of the Grand
Lodge upholding the ruling of a District Grand
Master that a proposition for non-confirmation of Min-
utes cannot be made merely for the purpose of allow-
ing Brethren to revise their opinions. As stated,
the only question at issue is the accuracy of record by
the Secretary.
In addition to reading the Minutes of preceding meet-
ings, and noting all important happenings at the
present meeting, the Secretary's duties in Lodge will
include the reading of Grand Lodge and other commu-
nications, and perhaps reporting to the Lodge upon
various matters which may have been entrusted to his
experienced care at the previous meeting.
T he major portion of the Secretary's duties,
however, are discharged away from the Lodge and ne-
cessitate the sacrifice of much of his personal lei-
sure. The following is a typical quotation from
Lodge By-Laws relating to the duties of the Secre-
tary :

" The Secretary shall, under the direction of the

Master, give every Member of the Lodge at least
 & *0+

seven days' notice of all Regular Meetings, and, in

case of emergency, such other notice as is required
by the Book of Constitutions, and shall insert in
such notices the nature of all business to be trans-
acted.
" He shall attend all the Meetings of the Lodge, and
shall keep Minutes of all proceedings and business
such as are proper to be written, which Minutes
shall be read at the next Regular Meeting, when
the Brethren shall either confirm or amend them.
" He shall file a copy of all Summonses convening
the Meetings ; make out all Returns for Grand
Lodge; inform every Member the amount of all subscrip-
tions and fees due ; collect all fees and subscriptions and
pay same over to the Treasurer; send a copy of the
Balance Sheet annually to every Subscribing Member,
together with a list of the Members and their addresses
and dates of Initiation or Joining ; and keep an inven-
tory of the Lodge property."
This quotation is sufficient to give some indication
as to the many and varied responsibilities devolving
upon our Brother Secretary. The list might be consid-
erably extended, but it will suffice to show that the
Scribe's Office is no sinecure.
In view of the many claims made upon him, and
the amount of time he must expend on his duties
away from the Lodge, many Lodges provide in
their By-Laws that Brother Secretary shall be
exempt from the payment of the annual subscription.
Such e xe mp tio n i s sanc tio ned in the B o o k o f
Constitutions, but Rule 504 makes it clear that in
*0>

such cases Secretaries "shall be considered in all

respects as regular subscribing members of their
Lodges, their services being equivalent to sub-
scription, provided their dues to the Grand Lodge
have been paid." In this connection it may be
noted that no such exemption may be granted to
any other Officer. Nor may Brother Secretary be des-
ignated as ' Honorary Secretar y'; the ter m '
Secretary' is alone recognised by the Constitutions.
An important point which the Secretary will do
well to remember is that, under the laws attaching
to Employers' Liability, a Lodge is liable in the case
of accident and injury to the Tyler while engaged
in his duties or travelling to and from the Lodge.
T his has b een definitely estab lished, and the
Secretary is neglectful of the Lodge's interests if
he omits to see that a few shillings are expended
annually on a protective insurance policy. Pro-
tection against fire and burglary is usually provided
for in Lodge By-Laws.
To be successful Brother Secretary must bring to
bear upon the execution of his duties a considerable
amount of tact, patience, perseverance, and a keen un-
derstanding of human nature. It may be irk-
someno doubt it isfor an experienced Secretary
to have to endure what he may regard as unnecessary '
interference ' from a young and inexperienced
Master . Yet it has to he reme mb ered that the
Master is the Master and, as such, his word is
law. Tact may overcome many difficulties. How-
ever experienced he may be, the Secretary should
avoid any suggestion of endeavouring to rule the
Master and the Lodge. It is his duty to consult
the Master upon all matters ; certainly no Lodge
Summons should ever be sent out until a draft
has been submitted to the Master for approval. It
is by such proper recognition of the Master's au-
thority that difficulties are avoided and harmony main-
tained.
We have somewhere seen the following lines anent
Brother Secretary :
" If he writes a letter, it is too long ; if he sends a post-
card, it is too short; if he attends a Committee, he is
butting in ; if he stays away, he is a shirker ; if the
attendance is small at Lodge, he should have whipped
the members up ; if he does do so, he is a nuisance
; if he presses a member for his dues, he is insulting;
if he does not, he is lazy; if a function is a great suc-
cess, praise is due to the Committee; if it is a fail-
ure, the Secretary is to blame; if he asks for sug-
gestions, he is incompetent ; if he does not, he is pig-
headed."
There is a lot of truth in it, yet, in the majority of
cases, Brother Secretary will carry on as heretofore,
cheerfully contributing to the comfort of his Brethren and
proving himself a tower of strength to the Worshipful
Master.
It will be noticed that no guiding hints are offered to
aid Brother Secretary in the discharge of his duties ; in all
probability he knows them better than we do.
 CHAPTER XX

shares with his Brother the

Tyler the distinction of being an elected Officer of the
Lodge. Neither of these Brethren depend for their
Office upon the favour of the Master ; they are
elected thereto by the votes of their Brethren in Open
Lodge assembled. The Treasurer ranks high in the
table of precedence, taking position immediately
after the Chaplain and before the Secretary. His Jewel
of Office is the Key, emblematical in its material sense
of the guardianship of the Lodge chest.
The Treasurer having no part in the ceremonial pro-
ceedings, there is little that need be said about his Office
in this Manual. That is not to say that the Office is
one of minor importance. The occupant of the Office is
generally a Past Master of many years' standing, and the
mere fact that he is elected, and not appointed by the Mas-
ter, is sufficient evidence that he holds the confidence
and regard of his Brethren. Election to this Office is,
quite rightly, regarded as no slight honour.
Perhaps the most useful hint which can be offered
 "

&+ Brother Treasurer is that he should at all times

adopt a moderate and fraternal attitude in his dealings
with the Brother with whom he will be brought into
most intimate contact. We refer, of course, to
Brother Secretary. It 21 an unfortunate truth that
these two vitally important officials do not always
work in complete harmony. The duties of each
should be clearly defined in the Lodge By-Laws,
and there should be no occasion for any hint of
friction between them. In the majority of cases
it is the Secretary who is responsible for the col-
lection of all monies due to the Lodge, which sums
he subsequently passes over to his colleague.
In the case of payments varying customs prevail.
some cases cheques are signed by the Treasurer
alone ; in others the Secretary countersigns the
cheques. The policy of two signatures appears to be
the wiser practice. Whichever custo m may o b -
t a i n , t h e T r e a s u r er s h o u l d n e v e r a d o p t a n atti-
tude of ' superiority ' in his dealings with his coad-
jutor.
Without in any way belittling the Office of Brother
Treasurer, still he may be reminded that his responsi-
bilities and worries are, in the majority of cases,
dwarfed into insignificance when compared with
those of Brother Secretary. Each of these respon-
sible Officers is, in all probability, . senior Past
Master of long experience. As such they should
long since have come to appreciate the significance
*45

of the first of the Three Grand Principles upon

which our Order is founded. Brothers Treasurer
and Secretary should, in the interests of the Lodge, culti-
vate and maintain at all times the most friendly and
fraternal of relations.
 CHAPTER XXI
&

18, Book of Constitutions, states that the

Grand Master shall appoint certain Officers, and
the list given includes 'T wo Grand Chaplains.'
Rule 68 states that a Provincial or District Grand
Master ' is empowered ' to appoint certain Pro-
vincial or District Grand Officers, and again the
list includes ' T wo Chaplains.' Rule 104 states
that the Master of a private Lodge may' appoint a
Chaplain.
I t will ther efo re b e seen that o ur Reverend
Brother the Chaplain is not a regular Officer. His is
one of the seven permissive Offices which may be
filled by the Master of a private Lodge. When so
filled the Chaplain's position in the table of
precedence is quite rightly a high one, coming
immediately after the Junior Warden and before
the Treasurer.
The description of the Chaplain's Jewel of Office,
as set out in the Constitutions, is ' a book within a
triangle surmounting a glory.' This Jewel serves to
emphasise the importance of the Office of its
wearer, for the ' book' referred to is the V.S.L.,
*4/ H

the first of the T hree Great Masonic Lights, a

Landmark of the Order without which no Lodge
may be opened.
Needless to say, the Office with which we are for
the moment concerned is one best occupied by a
Minister of Religion. The question as to whether it
is advisable, in the absence of a Reverend Brother, to
appoint a layman to the Office, is one which has pro-
voked much discussion. Many hold the opinion that,
generally speaking, it were better not to follow such a
course ; hut the question is one which must be left to
the discretion of individual Masters.
By common consent the position of our Brother
Chaplain in Lodge is near the Master, generally the
seat on the left of the Immediate Past Master. In
many Lodges the same position at the dinner-table is
regarded as the Chaplain's right, although, if our
Reverend Brother be not a Past Master, he will, perhaps,
be acting wisely not to obtrude himself in a position
prior to lay Brethren who are his seniors in the Craft.
T he Chaplain's d uties in Lodge are obvio us
to offer Prayer to the G.A.O.T.U.,and those
duties need not be dilated upon at length. Suffice it
to say that there should be perfect understanding be-
tween the Worshipful Master and the Chaplain,* and
that our Reverend Brother must be letter-perfect,
possessing sufficient knowledge of the Ritual t o e n -
able him to know without prompting the
B !! :.'. + : //4
 & 183
precise moment at which his voice should be heard.
Nothing detracts more from the dignity and im-
pressiveness of the proceedings than those unfor-
tunate pauses which occur when the inexperienced Chap-
lain 'misses his cue,' stumbling and faltering, at a loss
to find the solemn words which should have been ready to
his tongue.
Apart from praise to the G.A.O.T.U. there are
certain portions of the Ceremonies which may
with advantage be confided to the Chaplain if he
possess the requisite Masonic knowledge. The
Charge to the Candidate after Initiation is but one i n-
stance. As su mi ng B r o ther C hap lain to b e a
Minister of Religion, he is by virtue of his training a
scholar, and, it is to be hoped, an accomplished elocu-
tionist. The Entered Apprentice's Charge may be
entrusted to such a Brother with the certainty of
Profit and Pleasure as the result, both to the newly
initiated Brother and to all others present.
Outside the Lodge the Chaplain who has the
interests of the Craft at heart will no doubt find
many directio ns for the outlet of his Masonic
energies. T he duty of visiting Brethren absent
through sickness is one which he may well take upon
himself.
In the best regulated of Lodges little differences of
opinion will unfortunately occur at times among the
Brethren; and, if they be left unchecked, they may
assume dimensions likely to cause something in the
nature of a ' split ' in the Lodge. Brother
*4"

Chaplain, by nature a man of peace, may do much

to heal such differences by a few kindly, tactful
words. Such mediation, coming from a Minister
of Religion, will often be accepted where it might
possibly be resented from others.
There can be no doubt that the Chaplain who is
possessed of extensive Masonic experience, in ad-
dition to a wide knowledge of human nature, is a
valuable acquisition to any Lodge. The Master
whose list of Officers includes such a Brother is to
be congratulated upon his good fortune.
 would be difficult to lay too great an emphasis
upon the fact that any successful and well-conducted
Lodge must of necessity have in its Wardens two
Brethren who are not merely experienced in the
mysteries of the Craft, but Brethren who, by their
personal conduct, are fitted in every way to be
regarded as examples to their younger Brethren.
There is much to be learnt from the symbolism of
the Jewels worn by these two highly placed Officers of
the Lod ge. T he distinguishing Jewel of our
Brother the Senior Warden is the Level, art emblem o f
the i mp ar tial and eq uitab le co nd uct which
should characterise all his dealings with his Brethren. His
junior Brother is known by the familiar Plumb Rule,
the symbol of integrity and uprightness. Happy
the Lodge whose Wardens endeavour to live up to the
moral teachings of their respective insignia ; and happy
the master who has the support of such lieutenants in the
West and South.
The Wardens occupy positions of responsibility
nearly equal to that of the Master himself, and, while it
is an oft-repeated assertion that the power of the
*4>

Master is supreme, yet there is much evidence to

be found to support the equally familiar statement
that the Lod ge is r uled b y the Master and his
Wardens. Certain it is that the work of any Lodge
would be at a standstill without the efficient co-
operation of the Wardens.
During the Installation Ceremony, if it be cor-
rectly rendered, the D.C. asks : 'W.M., whom do
you appoint your Senior Warden ? ' In the case of
the Senior Deacon the inquiry is: ' Whom do you
ap p o int Senio r Deaco n? ' T he wo r d ' yo u r' is
o mitted. T o the W arden upo n investitur e the
Master says : 'Bro. A. B., I appoint you my Senior War-
den.' To the Deacon he says : 'I appoint you Sen-
ior Deacon of the Lodge.' The difference is wor-
thy of notice.
Rule 104, Book of Constitutions, states that :
"The regular Officers of a Lodge consist of the
Master and his two Wardens, a Treasurer, a Secre-
tary . . ." The possessive case is emphasised to
indicate the close personal connection existing
between Master and Wardens. It may fairly 'be
assumed that, to a great extent, the control of the
Lodge is presumed to be vested in the Master and
his Wardens. Brother Dr A. G. Mackey, whose
prolific pen produced Masonic writings almost rivalling
in number those of the famous Bro. Dr Oliver, included
in his list of additional Antient Landmarks of the Or-
der' Government of a Lodge by the Master and his
Wardens.' Therefore, these three, highly
 187
placed Officers should always present a united
front; in a well-ordered Lodge there should never be
the slightest suspicion of lack of unanimity be-
tween Master and Wardens.
No Brother has any claim to progress from one
Office to another,* but it may fairly be assumed
that when the Master appoints his Senior Warden he
is designating his successor. For that reason, if for
other, the greatest care is essential in filling that
important Office. In the case of the selection of the
Junior Warden the responsibility is almost as
gr eat, for it has to b e reme mb ered that the ap-
pointment carries with it the necessary qualification
for the future occupancy of the Chair of K.S.
Although no claim to progress is recognised, it
cannot be disputed that every Brother has a right to
aspire to the occupancy of the exalted position in
the East. The Warden, whether he be Senior or Jun-
ior, is very near to the fulfilment of his ambition, and
he owes it to his Lodge and to the Craft that he
should be conscientious in the discharge of his important
duties.
Wardens have many duties beyond the mere
repetition of their somewhat limited portions of the Rit-
ual; that may, perhaps, be regarded as the least of
their responsibilities. It is the duty of the Warden to
know a good deal regarding the contents of the
B o o k o f C o n s t i t u t i o n s . E ve n at p er so na l i n co n -
venience he should make opportunity to attend the
) (( *++&,+&( +, - 3!
44
Quarterly Communications of the Grand Lodge
because it is his duty, as a prospective ruler in the
Craft, to know what is happening there. He should
also be familiar with the intricacies of Masonic Juris-
prudence. Wardens should cultivate tact and dig-
nity. They should remember, too, that it is no
small part of their duty to attain to some degree
of competence as speakers.
This last is of greater importance than may be
apparent at a glance. It has to be remembered that
the Warden is likely soon to be the Master, and that
much of the dignity of the Lodge proceedings must de-
pend upon the Master's powers of oratory. Even the
most nervous and halting of speakers may make marked
improvement if he will but take the trouble when he
knows he is likely to be called upon to address his
Brethrento spend a little time beforehand in think-
ing of what he is going to say and how he is going to
say it. To the Brother who has been wise enough to
prepare his remarks in his early Masonic days
there may co me the time when, finding himself
called on for an impromptu speech, he will have cause
to be surprised at his own success, although he may not
then realise that he owes that success entirely to the
trouble and care he has taken in the past.
The responsibilities of the Wardens do not end
with the closing of the Lodge ; at Refreshment,* as
B ! :!' , !,'!( 2! - ( ;9 never 3! '!,!''! - .(
- ! ;'- ! '!! 1
 189
at Labour, they are the Master's chief Officers, and, as
such, they should do their share towards pre-
serving the dignity and harmony of the proceedings. It
is an unfortunate truth which has to be faced that
the proceedings at the social board are not always
characterised by proper decorum. In many Lodges
the custom of ' challenging ' is frequently carried to
excess. Brethren are on their feet every few min-
utes shouting across the room, and an atmos-
phere of undignified uproar prevails. The Master,
of course, is chiefly responsible for maintaining
order, but the Wardens presiding in the West and
South may do much to assist him in this connection. No
Warden would wish to assume the role of a ' kill-joy,'
but it is his duty to check anything in the nature of undue
hilarity and noisy behaviour.
At Refr eshment, as at Labo ur, the Wardens
should be prompt in answering the Master's .
And here Brother Warden may be reminded that
there is no need, either in Lodge or at the banquet, to
exert undue force in the use of the Such force is
frequently exerted, more particularly at the dinner-table
; peace is disturbed by a series of resounding
crashes which set the glasses jingling and often result
in the spilling of wine. Such heavy gavelling is
quite unnecessary and is a trial to the nerves.
The question as to whether the Wardens should
always be upstanding when the Master rises to pro-
pose a toast is one upon which there is a divergence
*#5

of opinion. It is a widely followed custom for the

Master to make the preliminary inquiry : Brother
Senior and Junior Wardens, how do you report the
glasses under your respective columns ? ' Upon
receiving the assurance: All charged in the West
(or South), Worshipful Master,' he gives the order:
'Please attend the charge,' or 'Principal Officers upstand-
ing.' Thus the Wardens are supporting the Master,
and, in effect, the toast ( submitted by the three Prin-
cipal Officers of the Lodge.
Fr eq uently, ho wever , the Master o mits the
inquiry or command referred to, in which case one
sometimes sees the Wardens rise voluntarily, while in
other cases they remain seated. In the latter case we
frequently see Brother Director of Ceremonies or
some other Brother excitedly signalling to the
Wardens to rise. In the opinion of the present
writer this is quite incorrect. If the Master himself
does not call upon his Principal Officers to rise
certainly no other Brother has the right to usurp the Mas-
ter's powers by so doing. It seems equally un-
desirable for the Wardens to rise voluntarily ; it
can only be regarded as an intimation that the Master is
negligent and has omitted a part of his duty. The wis-
est course is for the Wardens to come to a definite under-
standing with the Master beforehand.
In many large Lodges a Brother has to wait
several years before attaining the coveted dignity of a
Warden's chair, and it is to be expected that such Breth-
ren will have gained much experience in the
 191
science of Freemasonry before their appointment. In
these days of Masonic expansion, however, there are
new Lodges coming into existence practically every
week and comparatively young Masons find themselves
elevated to the responsible stations in the West and
South. For the benefit of such of our younger Brethren
some guiding hints are offered in the following chap-
ters.
 CHAPTER XXIII
=

8 of Hiram Abiff, Brother Junior

Warden is the third Officer of the Lodge, occupying a
position scarcely less responsible than that of his
senior colleague. His station is in the South. His
distinctive Jewel, the Plumb Rule, is the emblem of
Uprightness and Integrity. His column, that of the
Corinthian Order, is symbolic of Beauty; it should
be kept horizontal while the Lodge is at Labour,
and always raised when the Lodge is Called Off or
Closed.
Brother Junior Warden should remember that no
Lodge meeting can be adjourned. Under the Eng-
lish Constitution no Lodgenot even the Grand Lodge
itselfhas power to adjourn a meeting. The days of
Regular Meetings of all Private Lodges must be fixed
and approved by the Grand Lodge authorities, confir-
mation from that authority being essential before any
change may be made. Masters of Private Lodges may
call Lodges of Emergency,* but at every meeting, be
it Regular or Emergent, the Lodge must be Opened and
Closed. The Lodge being
 = *#)
closed, the meeting cannot possibly be adjourned. It
is, therefore, quite incorrect for the Junior Warden to
state that the meeting is adjourned.
All reports are first announced by the Inner
Guard to the Junior Warden, the latter Officer being
nominally responsible for the admission of all
Brethren, be they Members or Visitors. Perhaps it
seldom happens in a London Lodge that the Jun-
ior Warden is called upon to leave his chair and proceed
to the anteroom for the purpose of ' proving' a Vis-
iting Brother ; but he is liable at any time t o b e d i -
r e c t ed t o u n d e r t a k e t h a t d u t y. E v e r y Junior
Warden should know how to ' prove ' a stranger.
It is to be assumed that even the comparatively
young Mason who has made sufficient progress to
enable him to reach the dignified and important
position of Junior Warden will have acquired the neces-
sar y kno wled ge to make him thoroughly famil-
iar with the duties of that Office so far as they relate
to the Opening and Closing of the Lodge in the
Three Degrees. Those duties, therefore, will not
be dealt with here, but hints are appended for the
guidance of Brother Junior Warden during the Ceremo-
nies of Initiation, Passing, and Raising.

THE CEREMONY OF INITIATION

1.Upon the announcement from the I.G. that
t.i.a.r., the J.W. should give three slow and deliberate
while seated. He then rises, takes Sp., shows
*#"
Sn. of E.A., and reports to the W.M.* Upon receiv-
ing the W.M.'s reply the J.W. should dis. Sn.
smartly, keeping the h. open, resume seat, and give nec-
essary directions to I.G.
2.When the Can. is taken to the J.W. by the
J.D. the J.W. should remain seated until J.D. has
replied : ' By t.h.o.G.b.f.a.o.g.r.' J.W. then rises,
takes Can.'s r.h., says, ' Enter, f.a.o.g.r.,' and
resumes seat.
3.At the point where the Can. is restored to
L...t the Wardens should not use [image] Their ac-
tion here should be similar to that of the rest of
the Brethren.
4.Later when the Can. is again taken to the
J.W., after he has been entrusted by the W.M. with
the Ss. of the Degree, the J.W. should remain seated un-
til the Can. has answered that he has something to
communicate. J.W. then rises, takes Sp., and
proceeds with examination. J.W. should not give
the G. or T. until it has first been given by the Can.
At conclusion of examination J.W. says, ' Pass .
. . .' and resumes his seat.
T HE CE RE MO NY O F P AS SI N G
1.Upon the announcement by the I.G. that
t.i.a.r. the J.W. rises (no --1), takes Sp., shows
Sn. of F.C., and reports to the W.M. Upon
receiving reply the J.W. should dis. Sn. smartly,
4
' .99 .(!( A ! '!: '- - - ! - != ( ;9
'!2!23!' - - -;' ( body - A.' ( - ! ! =
( ;9 (-. (D;.'! - - ! -;' only his head - A.' (
- ! A ! ! . '!((!( 2
 = 195
keeping both h.'s open, resume seat, and give neces-
sary directions to I.G.
2.During first examination of the Can. the J.W.
should remain seated until the reply ' I have.' He
then rises, takes Sp., and receives the G. or T. of an
E.A.F.M. The J.W. should not give the G. or T.
until it has first been given by the Can. At con-
clusion of examination J.W. says, 'Pass . . .
and resumes seat.
3.At the next examination, when the Can. is
taken to the J.W. after he has been entrusted with
the Ss. of the Degree by the W.M., the J.W. remains
seated while he directs Can. to adv. to him as a
F.C., rising at the answer 'I have.' J.W. takes
Sp. and proceeds with the examination. J.W. should
not give the G. or T. until it has first been given by
the Can. At the conclusion of examination J.W.
says, 'Pass ..................' and resumes seat.
4.At the conclusion of the Explanation of the
T.B,, when the W.M. alludes to a certain symbol
the I.P.M. gives F24%6(G. which should be an-
swered by the S.W. and J.W. in proper order.*
T H E C E R E M O N Y O F R AI S I N G
1.Upon the I.G.'s announcement that t.i.a.r.,
the J.W. rises (no takes Sp., shows P.Sn., and
reports to the W.M. Upon receiving the W.M.'s
reply J.W. should dis. Sn. smartly, keeping the hand
J 99 '!- '! ( ;9 3! standing ;' - ! E:9. .- ,
- ! - ! ,, !'( .- - ! ' ''! - (-.- ( . - ! '!(- ,
- ! '!- '! .- !'! .' ; - ! - - ! A ' ( 1
! - - ! 5 1 F - 3!, '!G .99 - ! '!- '!
( A ,
*#>

open, and not forgetting to recover. He then resumes seat

and gives necessary instruction to I.G.
2.During his examination of the Can. the J.W.
should remain seated until the answer I have.'
He then rises, takes Sp., and receives the G. or T. of
an E.A.F.M. The J.W. should not give the G. or
T. until it has first been given by Can. At con-
clusion of examination J.W. says, 'Pass . . . .' and
resumes seat.
3.When the Wardens are summoned to assist
the W.M. the J.W. leaves his ped. by the left-hand
side and proceeds to correct position on right of Can., not
forgetting to take the P.R. with him. J.W. should d ir ect
Ca n. i n a wh i s p er to c . h. f. Ho ld Ca n. securely
and at proper moment touch his r.t. lightly with P.R.
4.Be careful to support Can. after W.M.'s
words s.h.a.v.b.o.t.f.' Accidents have been known to
occur at this stage. After this duty J.W. retires to
position behind Can.
5.When called upon by the W.M. to endeavour
to r.t.r.o.o.M.b.t.E.A.'s g..p. the J.W. should advance a
few paces and step across Can.'s k...s with r.f.
Raise Can.'s r.h. to try the G. Then replace Can.'s
r.h. gently by his side * and return direct to former posi-
tion. J.W. should not walk backwards. J.W. takes
Sp., shows P.Sn., and reports to W.M. Then dis. Sn.
smartly, not forgetting the recovery.
6.Assist W.M. when called upon for a certain
duty, and return to seat when directed to do so by
the W.M., not before.
B .' ! ( ( ;9 -! - .- - ! ! "! "#$% & &' "(
( ) # "( & ( #* +(*
 = *#7

CALLING OFF AND ON

E ver y J unior W ard en sho uld b e tho ro ughly
conversant with the procedure for Calling the
Brethren from Labour to Refreshment and vice
versa. F For details as to this portion of the cere-
monial see Chapter XXVII, p. 233.)
 CHAPTER XXIV

BROTHER SENIOR WARDEN in the West is representa-

tive of Hiram, King of Tyre, and his column, that of the
Doric Order, is typical of Strength. While the Lodge is open
this column should be vertical ; when the Lodge is Closed,
or called from Labour to Refreshment, it should be horizon-
tal.
The Senior Warden is next in rank and power to
the Worshipful Master himself, and in the Master's ab-
sence he may be required to accept responsibility for
the proceedings, although no Warden, not being an
Installed Master, may actually occupy the Chair of
K.S. In the event of the death or incapacity of the
Master, the Book of Constitutions (Rule 119)
states that it is the Senior Warden who 'shall act
as Master' in summoning the Lodge; he would be re-
sponsible, through the Secretary, for issuing the
Lodge Summons. The Constitutions are almost
silent as to further powers possessed by this Officer
in such an emergency. There seems little doubt,
however, that in the event of the death or incapacity
of the Master it must be the Senior Warden, as the
second Officer of the Lodge, who rules the Lodge
 *99

in every respect, with the single exception that

(unless already an I.M.) he may not occupy the
Master's Chair. In the circumstances referred to it
would be his right and his duty to preside at any Com-
mittee of the Lodge. Varying opinions are held
on this question. The Senior Warden, however, is
second in rank and authority to the Master h i ms e l f.
I n t he M as ter 's ab se nc e it se e ms a n obvious
inference that his authority must devolve upon his
'second in command.'
It is thus seen that strength of character and the
ability to rule firmly are desirable qualifications for
Brother Senior Warden to possess; yet he will be
wise to bear in mind that, in all his dealings with his
Brethren, strength and firmness gain added dignity
and win increasing regard when combined with
gentleness and courtesy.
Perhaps the most stimulating reminder which the Sen-
ior Warden can receive as to the importance of his
Office is the recollection that to him is entrusted the
solemn duty of investing the newly made Mason with
the distinguishing badge of the Order, the Badge
of Innocence and Bond of Friendship.
It might here be noted that to speak of the plain,
white apron as the badge of an Entered Apprentice
only is incorrect ; it is the badge of every Mason, be he
Entered Apprentice or a distinguished Officer of Grand
Lodge. Whatever decoration may have been added to the
apron, beneath it all is to be found the plain, white
lambskin, the Symbol of Innocence.
/55

As in the case of our Brother the Junior Warden,

we may assume that Brother Senior Warden is
already familiar with his duties so far as they apply
to the Opening and Closing of the Lodge in the
different Degrees. We therefore content ourselves
with appending guiding hints relating to the three
Ceremonies.
T H E C E R E M O N Y O F I N I T I AT I O N
1.During his first examination of the Can. the
S.W. should remain seated until the J.D. has replied '
By t.h.o.G.b.f.a.o.g.r.' S.W. then rises, takes
Can.'s r.h., and says, ' Enter, f.a.o.g.r.' The S.W.
should remain standing while J.D. places Can. in
proper position. S.W. then takes Can.'s r.h. in his
own l.h., takes Sp., shows P.Sn. of E.A., and pre-
sents the Can. to the W.M.* The S.W. should take
the trouble to memorise the full name of the Can.,
and not have need to consult a copy of the Summons. It
is such apparently trifling points which make all the
difference between smart and slovenly work.
2.Upon receiving reply from the W.M. the S.W.
should dis. Sn. smartly, keeping the hand open,
restore Can. to charge of the J.D., and resume seat.
3.The S.W. remains seated when next addressed
b y the W.M. and told to give the J.D. certain
directions.
4.At the point where the Can. is restored to
B ! 2;(- '!2!23!' - .- .- - ( (-. ! , - ! &!'!
2 7 - ! '(- ! '!! - ! &. ( Mr,' - Brother ' as
- ! (;3(!D;! - ! '!!( F !! & .:-!' : 94, under "
! !' ;.' @G
 /5*
- t he W ar d e ns s ho u ld n o t us e Q 2. !R
T heir action here should he similar to that of the
rest of the Brethren.
5.During the examination of the Can. after he
has been entrusted by the W.M. with the Ss. of the Degree
the S.W. remains seated until the Can. has answered that
he has something to communicate. S.W. should then
rise, take Sp., and proceed with examination. The S.W.
should not give the G. or u ntil it has fir st
b een give n b y Can. S. W . remains standing, and
shows Sn. of B.A. when presenting Can. to the W.M.
for 'some mark . .. * Dis. Sn. smartly when W.M.
replies, keeping the hand open.
6.Investiture of the Can. with the Badge. The impor-
tance of this duty has already been alluded to. S.W.
should not begin his remarks to Can. until the
badge is in position. He sho uld then hold lower
right-hand corner of the badge in his l.h. while
speaking. Needless to say, the S.W. should be let-
ter-perfect and the words should be spoken with
solemn impressiveness. At the words, . . never
disgrace that Badge .. .' the S.W. strikes badge
with his r.h. [image1] S.W. restores Can. to charge
of J.D. and resumes his seat. The S.W. should
never leave his ped. to invest the Can. in any
Degree.
J .99 .(!( A ! :'!(! - . &. - - ! - !
( ;9 3! .'!,;9 - .< 9 - ! &. 1( ' -
! ( ,'!D;! -97 (!! 9 &. 1( ' shoulder high, an
!E. !'.-! .-- -; ! A 9 ?( .A?A.'
- !'! ( ;9 3! . 9.: 37 - ! '!- '! .- - (
(-. ! $ !. ' - !' ( ;9 (-' ?! (
 !"# $ %& '($ ) * # $

T HE CE RE MO NY O F P AS SI N G
1.During his first examination of the Can. the
S.W. should remain seated until the answer `I have.'
He then rises, takes Sp., and receives the P.G. and
P.W. S.W. should not give the P.G. until it has
first been given by the Can. After examination
S.W. remains standing while S.D. places Can. in
proper position. S.W. then takes Can.'s r.h. in
his own 1.h., shows Sn. of F., and presents the Can. to
W.M.*
2.Upon receiving the W.M.'s reply the S.W.'
should dis. Sn. smartly, keeping the hand open,
restore Can. to charge of S.D., resume seat, and
give S.D. necessary directions.
3.At the next examination of the Can., after he
has been entrusted with the Ss. of the Degree by the
W.M., the S.W. should remain seated while he
directs the Can. to adv. to him as a F.C. first as an
E.A., rising when the Can. answers that he has
something to communicate. S.W. then takes Sp.,
and r eceives the G. or T . o f a F.C.F.M. S.W.
should not give the G. or T. until it is first given by
the Can.; at completion of examination S.W. says
'Pass ............. ' and remains standing while S.D.
places Can. in proper position. S.W. then takes
Can.'s r.h. in his own l.h., shows Sn. of F., and
presents Can. to W.M. for some further mark, etc.*
Dis. Sn. smartly when W.M. has replied, keeping
the hand open. Can. is now invested with the B. of
a F.C. S.W. must not leave his ped. to discharge
) ,##+ #+ / # -
 /5)
this duty.* S.W. restores Can. to charge of S.D.
and resumes his seat.
4.At the conclusion of the T.B., when the W.M. al-
ludes to a certain symbol, the I.P.M. gives H .
which must be answered by S.W. and J.W. in
proper order.[image1]
T HE C E R E M O NY O F RAI S I N G
1.During his first examination of the Can.
the S.W. should remain seated until the answer I
have.' He then rises, takes Sp., and receives the G.
or T. of a F.C.F.M. S.W. should not give the G. or
T. until it is first given by Can. S.W. then says '
Pass ............................' and resumes seat.
2.During the next examination the S.W. again re-
mains seated until the Can. answers I have.'
S.W. then rises, takes Sp., and receives the P.G.
and P.W. The S.W. should not give the P.G. until it
is first received from the Can. At conclusion of examina-
tion S.W. says, 'Pass .............................................' and
remains standing while S.D. places Can. in proper posi-
tion. S.W. then takes Can.'s r.h. in his own l.h. and pre-
sents him to the W.M., showing P.S. of a M.M. [image2]
3.Upon receiving the W.M.'s reply the S.W.
should dis. Sn. smartly, keeping the hand open and
not forgetting to recover. S.W. restores Can. to
charge of S.D. and resumes seat. He then gives
Deacons necessary directions.
4.When the Wardens are summoned to assist
B ( ;9 (!! - .- - ! 3. ! is removed 3!, '!
- ! & 3. ! is . C;(-! 3. ! , . !' ! '!!
( ;9 never 3! . C;(-! <!' - .- , . 9 A!' ! '!!
- !! , - -! : *#+ - !! , - -! B : /5*
/5"

the W.M. the S.W. leaves his ped. by the left-hand

side and proceeds to correct position on left of Can.,
not forgetting to take the L. with him. Hold Can.
securely and at proper moment touch his l.t. lightly
with the L.
5.S.W. should be careful to support Can.
pr operly at the W .M.'s wo r d s s.h.a.v.b.o .t.f.'
Accidents have been known to occur at this point.
After this duty S.W. retires to position behind Can.
6.When called upon by the W.M. to 'try ,the
F.C.'s,' the S.W. should advance a few paces and
step across Can.'s k...s with his l.f. Raise Can.'s
r.h. to try the G. Then replace Can.'s r.h. gently
by his side * and return direct to former position.
S.W. should not walk backwards. S.W. takes Sp.
and shows P.Sn. when reporting to W.M.; after-
wards dis. Sn. smartly, not forgetting to recover.
7.Assist W.M. when called upon for a certain
duty, and return to seat when directed to by W.M.,
not before.
8.On the Can.'s return to the Lodge, after he
has given correct salutes, the S.W. rises and takes
Can.'s r.h. in his own 1.h. He then takes Sp., shows
P.Sn., and presents the Can, to W.M. for some
further mark, etc. [image1]
9.S.W. should dis. Sn. smartly after receiving
W.M.'s reply, keeping the hand open, and not for-
getting to recover. S.W. now invests Can. with the
B. of a M.M., taking care to see that the F.C. badge is
first removed. [image2] Can. is then restored to
charge of the S.D., and S.W. resumes his seat.
B !! , - -! : *#> Q 2. !*R !! , - -! B
: /5*
!! , - -! : /5)
 CHAPTER XXV
.. .

speaking, this brief chapter should find no

place in a Manual devoted to Lodge Officers and their
duties, for the simple reason that the Immediate Past Mas-
ter is NOT an Officer of the Lodge. Arguments to the
contrary have been advanced long and loudly, but the
originators of such arguments have yet to advance a
single convincing fact in support of their theory.
To say that Brother Immediate Past Master wears a
' Collar of Office' is quite incorrect. He wears a
Past Master's Collar to which is appended exactly the
same emblem as that worn by every Past Master in the
Craft, namely, the 47th proposition of the First
Book of Euclid suspended from the Square. The
Immediate Past Master is in fact the Junior Past
Master of the Lodge; no more and no less. The
Officers of a Private Lodge are clearly defined in Rule
104, Book of Constitutions.*
Nevertheless the Immediate Past Master has, by
virtue of the fact that he is the Junior Past Master of
the Lodge, a certain stated position in the Lodge
B !! : 0# , ' (- , ,, !'(
/5>

for one year. His place is at the immediate left

of the Master, and Rule 119, Book of Constitutions,
stipulates that in the absence of the Master it is
Brother Immediate Past Master who has the first
claim to occupancy of the Chair. T he Book of
Constitutions further stipulates that if the Master of a
Lodge be prevented from attending the meetings
of the Board of Benevolence 'the Immediate Past
Master may supply his place.'
It is evident, therefore, that under certain cir-
cumstances the Immediate Past Master is generally re-
garded as the representative of the Master in the
latter's absence. This fact, however, should no t
lead him to the mistaken imp r essio n that he is
all-powerful. Instances have been known where,
upon the unfortunate death of the Master, Brother
Immediate Past Master has jumped to the erro-
neous impression that he becomes ipso ju r e t h e
r u l e r o f t h e L o d g e , a n d co n s e q u e n t frictio n
has ensued. Any such b lund er o n the part of
the Immediate Past Master can only arise from
culpable ignorance of the Book of Constitutions, a copy
of which was doubtless presented to him at his Ini-
tiation and again at his Installation. A reference to
Rule 119, Book of Constitutions, will make the mat-
ter clear to him.*
The Immediate Past Master sometimes holds the mis-
taken impression that, when the Master does not
B !! & .:-!' 8 : *#4 .( - A ';9!( - ! !
- ! .(-!'1( .3(! !
 207
himself conduct a Ceremony, it is the I.P.M. who
has the first right to act as deputy. He possesses no
s u c h c la i m . Rule 1 1 9 , Bo o k o f Co n s t i tu t io n s, as
quoted above, makes it clear that it is the Immediate
Past Master who has first claim to occupancy of the
Chair in the Master's absence. When the Master is
present he alone has the power to decide which Past Mas-
ter shall take his place if he temporarily vacates his
Chair. Similarly, it is for the Master to say who shall
deliver the Charge after the Initiation, or give
the Explanation of the T.B. after the Passing, if he
does not himself attend to these portions of the
Ritual.
As already stated, the station of the Immediate
Past Master is at the immediate left of the Master,
his accepted duty being to render such assistance
as the ruler of the Lodge may from time to time
require in the rendering of the Ritual. Obviously
the Immediate Past Master should be a competent
ritualist ; otherwise he cannot possibly afford proper as-
sistance to his chief with a diplomatic 'prompt '
when occasion demands.
However expert he may be, let Brother Immediate
Past Master remember that he should be 'seen and
not heard.' Certainly it is no part of his duty to
display his own ability at the cost of revealing the Mas-
ter's imperfections. Nothing is more disconcerting
to the Master and irritating to the Brethr en than
fo r the I mmed iate Past Master to b e constantly
'butting in' with totally unnecessary
/54

corrections. In a regular Lodge it matters nothing if

the Master substitutes a word foreign to the Rit-
ual, or transposes a sentence, so long as the
sp irit o f the Rit ual is b eing co n ve yed to the
Candidate.
Unfortunately many Immediate Past Masters seem
unable to realise this truth, and, strangely enough,
the worst offenders are frequently experienced
Preceptors. It should be remembered that there is
a wide difference between the functions of a Pre-
ceptor in his Lodge of Instruction and those of the
Immediate Past Master in a regular Lodge.
During Labour Brother Immediate Past Master's
duties include the opening of the V.S.L. when the
Lodge is opened in the First Degree, and the correct
placing of the Sq. and C.'s in that and subsequent
Degrees. He should be careful to see that the
V.S.L. is correctly placed so that the Master can
read it; also that the points of the C.'s are towards
the Master.*
At the clo sing o f the Lod ge the I mmed iate
Past Master is entrusted with a brief portion of the
Ritual, where he reminds the Brethren that 'nothing
now remains but, according to ancient custom, to
lock up our Ss. in a safe (not " and sacred") repository,
uniting in the act F.F.F.' T he I mmed iate Past
Master should not add the ejaculation ' And may G. pre-
serve the Craft.' It is no part of the Ritual and is
quite redundant; the Master or Chaplain has
) (( -%$% 0. - I. %91+ *++&,+&( +, - "
 209
already offered pious Prayer that the G.A.O.T.U.
will preserve the Order.'
T he Lo d ge b eing clo sed , a fault fr eq uentl y
committed by the Immediate Past Master is to
thrust himself forward to take place in the outgoing pro-
cession immediately behind the Master. This is
quite incorrect. It has the appearance of dis-
courtesy, although probably arising only from lack of
kno wledge. T he Immediate Past Master not being
an Officer of the Lodge, he has no prescribed place as
such in the procession. Officers of Grand Lodge
should follow the Wardens in proper order, followed by
Grand Stewards, Brethren of London Rank and of
Provincial and District Grand Rank.* Then come
the Past Masters, among whom the Immediate Past
Master is numbered.
At Refreshment Brother Immediate Past Master
again occupies the seat at the left of the Master. In
the majority of Lodges custom dictates that the
Master 'takes wine' with various Brethren and
sections of Brethren during the progress of the
banquet. It is the Immediate Past Master (as a
general rule) who rises to call upon the Brethren
who m the Master may desire to honour. In all
probability the Master will leave the selection largely to
the B r o ther o n his le ft, and the I mmed iate Past
Master will be well advised to exercise discretion
by a strict limitation of the number of times the Master
'takes wine.' The custom of announc-
e
(( -%$% ". - A00
45-14
/5

ing that the Worshipful Master will ' take wine with
the Brethren on his right' and subsequently 'with
the Brethren on his left' is one to be deplored,
resulting as it generally does in undignified uproar.
The prandial proceedings following a Lodge meet-
ing should be characterised by that same dignity
and decorum which, it is to be hoped, have marked
the proceedings during the period of Labour.
Brother Immediate Past Master may do much to-
wards preserving that dignity and decorum.
 CHAPTER XXVI

Freemason who has received from his Brethren

the highest honour they have in their power to
confer upon him, that of election to the Chair of
K.S., finds himself placed in the East,the ancient
seat of Learning and Wisdom. It is to be hoped,
therefore, that he has gathered knowledge and
wisdom during his passage through the subordinate Of-
fices ; that he is well-skilled in the Noble Science; and
that he is able and willing to undertake the management
of the work and the government of the Lodge.
Yet, even so, the newly installed Master will
probably find that he has still much to learn. To
attempt, within the scope of a single chapter, to
provide him with all the knowledge he will need,
would be to essay the impossible; no more can be at-
tempted than a very brief survey of his rights and re-
sponsibilities, and to emphasise a few important
rules for his guidance.
1.Master's Obligation.
Every Master-Elect, before he is placed in the
Chair, must take an Ob., pledging himself solemnly
/ /

to preserve the Landmarks of the Order, to observe

the ancient usages, and strictly to enforce them in his
Lodge.
2.Period of Office.
No Brother may continue as Master for more than two
years in succession, unless by dispensation; but he
may again be elected after being out of Office for one
year. This regulation does not apply to a Prince of
the Blood Royal, but it shall apply to his Deputy if such
be appointed.
3.Dual Mastership.
A Brother may not rule as Master of more than
one Lodge at the same time, except by dispensation.
4.Election and Installation.
Rule 1o5, Book of Constitutions, which relates to
the Election of Master, states: "At the next Regular Meet-
ing the first business after the opening of the Lodge
shall be the reading of the Minutes of the preceding
meeting, and if they be confirmed so far, at least, as
relates to the election of Master, he shall be deemed to
be elected, and shall be duly installed in the Chair ac-
cording to ancient usage."
The wording of this rule is not as explicit as it
might be; actually, it is the election itself which
must be confirmed. The inclusion of this point in
the Constitutions implies that, on so vitally im-
portant a question, Grand Lodge deems that the
Brethren should have time for reflection. In the
absence of any motion to the contrary, the con-
firmation of the Minutes signifies the confirmation of
the election, but the Minutes, as such, are only
 /*)

to be confirmed or non-confirmed on the score of accu-

racy of record. (See Chapter XIX, p. 173.)
Strictly speaking, then, if the Minutes are an
accurate record of the proceedings at the Election Meet-
ing they should be confirmed, and a motion for
non-confirmation of the election 'arises out of ' the
Minutes. Such a motion might quite properly be
put forward on the grounds that the election was not
conducted in a constitutional manner, or even on
the grounds of a change of mind among the
Br ethren. Yet neither of these r easo ns wo uld
imply that the Secretary had inaccurately recorded
the happenings at the previous meeting.
5.Master's Right to Rule his Lodge.
Without doubt every Master has the right to rule
his Lodge, and, in so doing, to exercise his own
judgment irrespective of any pressure which may be
brought to bear upon him. The wise Master will
lend a willing ear to the counsel of Brother Secretary
and the Past Masters, and will thus find his path
made easier. Yet the time may come when, in some
case of difficulty, he finds himself conscientiously
unable to fall in with the opinions of his seniors in
the Craft. In such an unhappy eventuality it
would be not merely his right but his duty to rely
fo r g u id a nc e up o n h i s o wn j ud g me n t, a nd to
exercise his authority without fear. He may find conso-
lation in the reflection that none has the right to dis-
pute that authority.
6,Master presides at all Meetings.
Naturally the Master has the right to preside at all
meetings of the Lodge during his year of Office, a
/*"

similar right existing in the case of any meeting of a

Committee in connection with the Lodge. No
Past Master or body of Past Masters may convene
any such Committee without the authority of the
Master, and if any such meeting be held it would be ir-
regular and the proceedings void.
7.Master's Right to Decide the Work.
I t i s u n fo r t u n ate l y a fa ct t hat ma n y L o d ge
Secretaries take upon themselves po wers with
which they have never been vested. Particularly is
this so in respect to the Lodge Summons. The
Master alone has the right to decide what work shall ap-
pear upon the Summons, and the time at which the
Lodge shall meet.
8.Master's Ruling Supreme.
At all Lodge Meetings the Master's ruling is
supreme and cannot be questioned. I n case o f
any illegality the Brethren have the remedy of
subsequent appeal to higher authority.
9.Master has Casting Vote.
In the case of an equal vote (with certain ex-
ceptions) the Master has the right to an extra or casting
vote. In Rule 156, Book of Constitutions, it is definitely
stated that when the votes are equal on any question
demanding a majority the Master shall give a sec-
ond or casting vote. The Master is, of course, free
to use the casting vote as he may think fit; there is
no written law to control him. At the same time
there is a strong unwritten law. The Master
should remember that the intended purpose of the
casting vote is not to enable him to force his
 /*+

individual convictions upon his Brethren, but rather to

assist the Lodge in the case of a possible deadlock. Gen-
erally speaking, it sho uld b e exercised to pre-
serve the status quo ante, and cases may arise where
it is the duty of the Master to vote against his personal
convictions.
Assuming, for instance, that there is a motion
before the Lodge to change the By-Laws, and that
the Master personally favours the change. The
matter is surely of vital importance to all the
Brethren, and should demand a clear majority.
The votes being equal, the Master is incurring a
grave responsibility if he uses his powers to force
such a change from personal inclinations. He would be
better advised to use the casting vote against his personal
inclinations, thus preserving the status quo ante until
the matter may be further considered before it is
brought up again before the Lodge.

10.Refusing Admission to Visitors.

Under Rule 126, Book of Constitutions, the
Master of every Private Lodge has the right to
refuse admission to a Visiting Brother, although, be it
noted, the Constitutions add the proviso: " Whose pres-
ence he has reason to believe will disturb the harmony
of the Lodge, or to any visitor of known bad charac-
ter."

11.Temporary Exclusion of Members.

Only ignorance of the Constitutions can account
for the mistaken impression held in many directions
that the Master has the power to call upon a Brother to
retire from the Lodge. He has no such power.
/*6

Rule 179, Book of Constitutions, states that if any

Brother shall behave in Lodge in such a manner as to
disturb the harmony of the Lodge, be shall be
formally admonished by the Master; and, if he
persists in his irregular conduct, he shall be punished by
censure, fine, or exclusion for the remainder of t he
me et i n g. B ut it s ho u ld b e no ted t ha t t he Mas-
ter alone has no right or power to pronounce sen-
tence on the offender. The rule adds: " . . . ac-
cording to the opinion of the majority of the members pre-
sent."
It is obvious, therefore, that in any such unhappy
eventuality a motion for the offending Brother's
exclusion must be duly made and seconded, and
carried by a majority , - ! members present. The itali-
cised words are of vital importance. Assuming that
twenty-four Brethren were present, and that there
were twelve votes for the motion for exclusion, four
votes against, and eight abstentions from vot-
ing, the motion would be lost. A majority of the
Brethren present (not merely those voting)
would demand at least thirteen votes for the motion. It
is worthy of notice, too, that in the case of an
equal vote of twelve for and twelve against, the
Master would not, as in other cases, have the power
of a casting vote, the rule definitely stating that
decision depends on a majority of the members
present.
12.Permanent Exclusion of Members.
Lodge has power permanently to exclude a
Brother for what it may deem to be 'sufficient
cause.' In such a case there must be served upon
 /*0

the Brother whose exclusion is under consideration,

not less than seven days previous to the meeting, a
notice in writing, together with particulars of the com-
plaint against him, stating the time and place ap po inted
fo r its co nsider atio n, wh en he may a t t e n d a n d
b e h e ar d . ( R u l e 8 o , B o o k o f C o n stitutions.)
In the case of a resolution for permanent exclusion the
Constitutions stipulate that the power can only be
exercised by a majority of not less than two-thirds of
the members present. Again abstention from vot-
ing would count against the motion. Assuming an
attendance of forty-five members, with twenty-nine
voting for exclusion, three against, and thirteen ab -
st ai n i n g, t he mo tio n wo ul d b e lo st. A t wo -
third s majo rity wo uld demand not fewer than
thirty votes for the exclusion.

13.Exclusion and Expulsion.

It should be noted that there is a vast difference be-
tween exclusion and expulsion. A Brother per-
manently excluded from a Private Lodge is not
debarred from seeking admission to another Lodge. Ex-
pulsion, on the other hand, would mean total loss
of all Masonic status and privileges. Only the Grand
Lodge has power to expel a Brother from the Craft.
14.Master's Right to Appoint Officers.
A Master's prerogative which is in some danger
of being usurped in some directions is his undoubted
right to appoint his own Officers, with the exception of
the Treasurer and Tyler. The Master's powers
/*4

in this connection are clearly defined in the Consti-

tutions, and none has the slightest authority to dispute
them. The Master may, if he so desires, consult
the Lodge Committee, but no Committee has any
claim to decide the appointments to Office. The
present writer knows of at least one prominent E mula-
tion-working Lodge where the Master's preroga-
tive in this connection is invariably usurped. Such a prac-
tice can only be regarded as an unwiseeven a danger-
ousprecedent.
15.Master has no Power to Remove an Officer.
The Master has no power to displace any Officer
once he has been duly appointed and invested. It is
set out in Rule 120, Book of Constitutions, that
should the Master be dissatisfied with the conduct of
any Officer he must lay the cause for complaint be-
fore the Lodge at a Regular Meeting, not less
than seven days' notice of which must be sent to
the Brother complained of. The Officer in question
can only be displaced if the complaint be deemed
well founded by a majority of the Brethren present.
(See para. II.) It is, therefore, quite obvious that,
during the Installation Ceremony, the Master has no
power summarily to dismiss the Officers of the
Lodge by the sweeping statement that he declares
`all Offices vacant.' (See para. 4, p. 239.)

16.Master should Instal his Successor.

It is not only the right but the duty of a Master to
conduct the Installation of his successor. Among
the majority of London Masons such a reminder
may appear superfluous. Yet, even in these enlight-
 /*#

ened times, there are Lodges, more particularly in

the distant Provinces, wherein senior Past Masters con-
duct this important ceremony year in and year out.
The author knows of one such Lodge where a
grey-bearded veteran is wont to proclaim with
much pride that he has installed nearly a score of
M a s t e r s . T h a t s a me B r o t h e r wo u l d p r o b ab l y
regard it as a personal affront if it were suggested to
him that he should stand aside to permit the outgoing
Master to conduct the Ceremony. Such a practice is
entirely wrong and is inimical to the interests of the
Craft. Provided that the outgoing Master is suffi-
ciently a master of his work (as he should be) it can-
not be emphasised too strongly that it is his right
and his duty to set the consummating seal upon
his period of Office by Installing his successor in the
Chair of K.S. Of this prerogative none has the
slightest vestige of a right to seek to deprive him.
17.Master's Right to Conduct all Ceremonies.
The Master has a right to conduct every Ceremony ap-
pearing on the Agenda during his year of Office, but
where the list of ceremonial work is a lengthy one he
will be ill-advised to insist upon the right if he is in
the position of being able to call upon experi-
enced Past Masters for assistance. There are many
Lodges, meeting say four or five times a year,
which have the Ceremonies of the T hree Degrees
on the Agenda at every meeting. For the Master to
insist on taking all these twelve or fifteen Ceremonies
himself savours of conceit and selfishness. Further-
more, however competent a ritualist
//5

the Master may be, or may consider himself to be,

such an insistence on his rights will undoubtedly
inflict boredom on bis Brethren.
When the Master has himself passed the Chair
he will be in a position to appreciate the fraternal consid-
eration of the Master who shares his responsibilities
with the Past Masters and thus gives them a more ac-
tive interest in the proceedings. The author vividly re-
members an occasion when a well-known Emulation-
worker, during his year of Mastership, worked all the
Three Degrees and the Installation Ceremony at one
meeting. There is nothing clever in such an exhibi-
tion; it merely bores the listeners and conveys the
impression that the occupant of the Chair is showing off.'
18.----Master not to Surrender his Collar.
A recent ruling from the authorities has stipulated
that when the Master temporarily vacates his chair in
favour of a Past Master he should not surrender his
collar, but that the deputy for the time being
should be properly clothed according to his rank.
So multifarious and complex are the prerogatives of
the supreme ruler of the Lodge that the list might be
extended ad libitum; lack of space, however, pro-
hibits extension. The inquiring Brother, recently
installed or about to be installed, will do well to
spend a quiet hour or two with the Book of Con-
stitutions, a book, one fears, all too frequently - ' A
carelessly aside, and all too seldom studied.
To attempt to deal adequately with the responsibilities
of the Master of the Lodge within the space
 //*

at our disposal is another hopeless task. Yet it may

be possible to refer to a few points upon which
newly installed Masters may be in some doubt.
19.Master Responsible for Custody of Warrant.
No Lodge, except while acting under dispensation
in the Dominions or in foreign parts, can meet without a
Warrant of Constitution from the Grand Master. This
regulation, however, does not apply to the Lodge of
Antiquity, No. 2, the Royal Somerset House and Inver-
ness Lodge, No. 4 and the Lodge of Fortitude and Old
Cumberland No. */ which act under Time Immemo-
rial Constitutions.
If the Warrant be lost or improperly withheld
from those lawfully entitled to hold or use it, or
withheld by competent Masonic authority, a Lodge
must suspend its meetings until a new Warrant or Warrant
of Confirmation has been applied for and granted by the
Grand Master, or until the withheld Warrant be restored.
Chief among the responsibilities of the Master is
the custody of the Lodge Charter or Warrant. To
every Master this vitally important document is entrusted
on the night of his Installation; and one of his last
duties is to transfer it to his successor. In some
Lodges the Warrant is framed and hung in the
Lodge Room; in others it is kept with various parapher-
nalia in the Lodge-box. The former practice is, per-
haps, preferable to the latter, but both are wrong.
The Master during his year of Office is the right-
ful custodian of the Warrant and, as such, he should
make himself responsible for its safe keeping.
///
20.Master Responsible for Observance of Laws.
In Rule 114, Book of Constitutions, it is laid down
that the Master is responsible for the due observance
of the laws by the Lodge over which he presides. Obvi-
ously, then, the Master should be thoroughly conver-
sant with the Constitutions and with the By-
Laws of his own Lodge.
21.Candidates should receive By-Laws.
A responsibility of the Master, sometimes neglected, is
to see that every Initiate and Joining Member is sup-
plied with a printed copy of the Lodge By-Laws. This
presentation of the By-Laws to every Brother becom-
ing a member of the Lodge is not merely a custom,
it is a definite rule from the Grand Lodge. (See Rule
538, Book of Constitutions.)

22.Master's Responsibility for Ballots.

The Master is, of course, responsible for seeing
that every ballot is conducted in a constitutional
manner. Except in certain cases of emergency, as
set forth in Rule 160, Book of Constitutions, no
person may be made a Mason unless he has been
pr opo sed and seco nded in open Lo d ge at o ne
Regular Meeting, and balloted for 'at the next
Regular Meeting.' If a Candidate does not present
himself for Initiation within one year after his
election, the election is void. An election for a
Candidate for Initiation or Joining must be by
ballot, and no Candidate may be elected if, on the
ballot, three negative votes appear against him.
The By-Laws of a Lodge, however, may enact that
one or two negative votes shall exclude a Candidate.
 THE WORSHIPFUL MASTER 223
A collective ballot is quite regular, provided that, if
there be a negative vote, each Candidate shall then
be balloted for individually.* Ballots for Candidates
for Initiation and Joining should be taken separately,
the motives governing the voting in each case being
quite distinct. When announcing the result of a
ballot it is as well for the Master to avoid use of the
word 'unanimously,' using 'duly' instead. If the
By-Laws of the Lodge enact that two negative votes
shall exclude a Candidate, and one such vote is
recorded, the Candidate is still ' duly ' elected.
Therefore, if the Master announces that he declares
the Candidate 'duly elected' his statement is quite
accurate and in compliance with the By-Laws.
23.Honorary Members.
A b allo t is necessar y for the electio n o f an
H o n o r a r y M e m b e r , s e e R u l e 1 6 7 . T h e B o o k of
Constitutions, which reminds us that a Brother who
has ceased to be a subscribing Member of a
regular Lodge shall not be permitted to visit an y
Lo d ge mo re than o nce, b ut that 'this r ule shall
not apply to the visits of a Brother to any Lodge
in which he has been elected an Honorary Member.'
Election to Honorary Membership gives a Brother no
status or privileges outside the Lodge which has so
elec ted hi m. H e ma y no t , a s a n Ho no r ar y
Member, hold any Office in the Lodge, nor take
part in any vote; nor must he be included in the
Returns to Grand Lodge.
Whether an Honorary Member has any right to
/ (( -%$% 0 -
//"

partake of refreshment must, of course, be a matter

for the decision of the Lodge. Although signing
the Attendance Book as a member, he is virtually a
guest, and, as such, it is to be assumed that the
Lo d ge will glad ly entertain him at the so cial
board.
24.Proposal Forms.
For many years it has been necessary for all
Candidates for Initiation and Joining to fill up a
Proposal Form, which must also bear the signatures of
the Proposer and Seconder, and be countersigned by
the Master after the Candidate's admission. This
Form, duly completed, must be handed to the Secretary
before the proposition is made in open Lodge, and
must be read immediately before the ballot is taken.
25.Intervals between Degrees.
Rule 172, Book of Constitutions, points out that an in-
terval of four clear weeks must elapse between the con-
ferment of Degrees (with certain exceptions in Lodges
overseas). No doubt Brother Secretary may be
trusted to see that no mistake is made under this law,
but in this, as in all other matters, the responsibility
is the Master's.
26.Quorum in Lodge.
The Master should at all times remember that
five members must always be present to form a
quorum before the Lodge can conduct any Masonic busi-
ness.
Among other responsibilities attaching to the
occupancy of the Chair of K.S. may be mentioned
 2 25
the instruction of the subordinate Officers ; a con-
viction as to the entire suitability of prospective Candi-
dates; an absolute punctuality in the opening of all
Lodge Meetings ; a regular attendance at the Quarterly
Communications of Grand Lodge ; a strict obser-
vance of the Landmarks of the Order at all meetings
of the Lodge ; a thorough knowledge of the Ritual in
all its branches.
Well may the newly installed Master who reads
these words open his eyes and ask : Am I really
responsible for these matters ? He is responsible
for them and for very many others which cannot here be
stated.
Unless he be very unfortunately placed, the Master
will have the benefit of the counsel of an experienced
Secretary and the willing support and co-operation of
Past Masters ever ready to help him so far as lies in
their power. But to none can he really delegate his
responsibilities. As the ruler of the Lodge the Mas-
ter is largely responsible for its continued progress
and welfare. To quote from the impressive address
delivered to him at his Installationthe Honour,
Reputation, and Usefulness of the Lodge will materially
depend upon the skill and assiduity with which he man-
ages its concerns, while the happiness of its members will
be generally promoted in proportion to the zeal and ability
with which he promulgates the genuine principles of the
Institution.
Some detailed hints for the guidance of the newly in-
stalled Master are set out in the following chapter.
45-55
//>

In conclusion, let it again be urged on every present

and prospective Master to familiarise himself with
th e B o o k o f C o n s t i t u t i o n s . Le t hi m r e me mb er ,
too, that he who would rule successfully must first
learn to serve loyally.
 CHAPTER XXVII
(contd.)
OPENING THE LODGE
1.It is scarcely necessary to emphasise that the
W.M. should be early in his attendance at all meet-
ings; punctuality in the W.M. is something more
than a desirable virtue, it is a bounden duty. There
may be many points upon which the Secretary or
some other Officer wishes to consult the W.M. be-
fore the Lodge is opened and ample time should be
allowed. Possibly some of the Officers may be ab-
sent, and the W.M. will probably hold consultation
with the D.C. as to suitable deputies. It all takes
time. The Master who is always punctual and who
makes a point of opening the Lodge at the exact time
stated on the Summons will find that his example is infec-
tious.
2.If an Opening Ode is sung it should be sung before
the Lodge is opened.
3.Immediately following the Ode the W.M.
gives to call the Brethren to order and proceeds : '
Br ethren, assist me to op en the Lod ge.' T he
W.M. should remember when putting the first two ques-
tions to the Wardens that he addresses them by name. Need-
less to say, that when the W.M. calls
227
//4

the Brethren to order ' in the First Degree' he

should himself set an example of smartness in this con-
nection. All the W.M.'s Sns. should be given with
military precision and smartness.
4.At the Emulation Lodge of Improvement the
question as to the Master's place is always addressed
to the S.W. the majority of regular Emulation-
working Lodges it is addressed to the I.P.M.
5.Perfect understanding is essential between the
W.M. and the Chaplain, if there be a Chaplain
among the Officers. In many Lodges the W.M.
says, The Lodge being duly formed . . .,' and the
Chaplain then adds : Before the W.M. declares it
open let us invo ke .. .' It seems a clumsy and
unnecessary procedure thus to divide one sentence be-
tween two speakers. A better method is for the Chap-
lain to say: 'The Lodge being duly formed, b e-
fo r e the W .M. d eclar es it o p en .. * W her e
there is no Chaplain (as at Emulation Lodge of Im-
provement), the W.M., of course, renders this por-
tion of the Ritual.
6.Upon the words: 1 declare the Lodge duly
open,' the W.M. and all Brethren should dis. Sn.
smartly, keeping the hand open The W.M. then
gives proper . He should not be seated until the
Tyler has replied to the 1( Ks. The
will attend to the opening of the V.S.L. and the
B ( 2 9.' :'. - ! ( . < (.39! A ! :! - ! !
- ! ! ! '!! . A ! &9 ( - ! ! . '(-
! '!!(
K 2 9.'97 - ! ! . ' ! '!!( ! .
( ;9 3! ?!:- :! A ! ( .' all .( (
N 2 9.' '! - ( .::97 A ! :! ' 9 ( - !
! .99 ! '!!(
 //#
placing of the Sq. and C.'s. The W.M., however,
should be sure that the V.S.L. is correctly placed
so that he can read it.* The Sq. and C.'s should be
so placed that the points of the latter are towards
the W.M.

&
7.Remembering his responsibilities the W.M.
must be careful to see that any E.A.'s retire before
the Lodge is opened in the Second Degree. Even
though he has reason to believe that none is present, it
is a wise precaution to use the familiar phrase. `If
there are any E.A.'s present I must now ask them
to retire from the Lodge.' T he W.M. can never go
wrong in doing this, as a Lodge cannot be opened di-
rectly into the Second or Third Degree.
8.When discharging the Sn. the W.M. should
drop the 1.h. at the words 'duly open,' and draw
the r.h. smartly a.t.b. at the words ' on the Sq.'
9.The Lodge being open in the Second Degree
the I.P.M. will attend to the Sq. and C.'s. It does
not matter which p...t of the C.'s is exposed.

10.The W.M. should request all F.C.'s - retire be-

fore proceeding.
- ( not ! !((.'7 - .- - ! 8 ( ;9 3! :! .- . 7
:.'- ;9.' .:-!' ! '(- '!.- - .( '7 ( - ! entire
volume. - 2;(- 3! :! A 9! - ! ! ( .- .3 ;' 3;-
- !'! ( .;- ' -7 , ' ( (- ;: :! - .- . 7 :.'
- ;9.' .:-!' ' :. !
/)5

11.When discharging the Sn. at the words '

duly open on the C.,' the W.M. should remember
that there is no recovery at this point. This is the
only occasion when there is no recovery in discharging
the P.Sn. of the Third Degree.

12.There is probably no part of Masonic ceremonial

more frequently marred by clumsiness and inexperience
than the communication of the Subs. Ss. of a M.M.
between the Wardens and between the W.M. and
S.W. The proceedings cannot be described here
in detail; practice in a is the only way to attain
perfection. It may be mentioned, however, that there is
frequently unnecessary delay after the communica-
tion of the Subs. Ss. by the S.W. to the W.M.
Each waits for the other to move. It is the W.M.,
as the senior Officer, who should first turn away and
return to his seat.*
13.When the G. or R. Sn. is given at the words
All G. to the M.H.' the r.h. should be brought
back immediately to position for the P.Sn., and not
first dropped to the side.
14.After giving Brother S.W. his command to
close the Lodge the W.M. should give the K.'s with
B ! , '(- (-. ! 22; .- - ! ;3( ( , .
( - ! . 9!. ,' 2 - ! ! - - ! '
! '!! ! , 99 A - ! ( , . . - !
.997 - ! ( , . .'! <! - ! !
( ,- ! . & ! '!! ( ;9 not 3! <!
 231
his left hand, maintaining the P.Sn. with his r.h.
The correct K.'s at this stage are those of the Third De-
gree.*
&
&
*+ H ,-!' giving the S.W. his command to close the
Lodge the W.M. should give the K.'s with his left
hand, immediately elevating it again to resume the
H.Sn. or Sn. of P. ! correct K.'s at this stage
are those of the Second Degree.*
C L O S I N G T HE L O D G E G E N E R AL L Y
16.After giving the S.W. his command to close
the Lodge the W.M. should give the K.'s with his
left hand, maintaining the P.Sn. with his r.h. The
correct K.'s at this stage are those of the First Degree.*
*0 H , a Closing Ode is sung, it should be sung after
the Lodge is Closed.
T HE RI SI N G S
At all Regular Meetings the Master, prior to the
Closing of the Lodge, 'rises' for the first, second,
and third times to 'ask if any Brother has aught to
propose for the good of Freemasonry in general or o f
this Lod ge in particular.' T his is no t so done
at an Emergency Meeting, because such a meeting
is called for a distinct, emergent purpose, which
must be stated on the Summons, and no other
business may be transacted.
B !! : /0#
Q 2. !*R !! & .:-!' : *0) ; !' ! ! '!-.'71
. :.'. > : /"*
/)/

The Master's correct method of procedure for

the ' risings ' is to give one 1 which is answered
by the Wardens. He then rises for the first time
to 'ask if any Brother has aught to propose . .
It is impossible to lay down hard and fast rules
as to the particular business to be dealt with on each '
r ising '; much d epend s up o n lo cal or Lod ge
customs, and none has any right to dogmatise on the
subject. Generally speaking, however, it is a safe
rule to reserve the 'first rising' for matters con-
nected with Grand Lodge.*
If there are no Grand Lodge matters to be dealt
with it is a common custom for Brother Secretary
to rise with Sp. and Sn. and announce: 'Nothing
from Grand Lodge, W.M.'
T he W .M. t he n r ep eat s and r is e s to r ep eat
his question for the second time. Again local and
Lodge customs must dictate procedure. In many
Provincial Lodges it is customary to reserve this
rising for matters connected with the Provincial
Grand Lodge, all other business being dealt with
on the 'third rising.' If there are no Provincial
Grand Lodge matters Brother Secretary rises with
Sp. and Sn. and announces: 'Nothing from
Provincial Grand Lodge, W.M.'
The business for the 'second rising' duly disposed
of, the Master again gives [image] and rises to put
his inquiry for the third time, when any other busi-
ness may be brought before the Lodge.
B - ( 2!- 2!( .::! ( - .- - ( ' ( 1 ' - !' !
'!-.'7 .( - '!. . 22; .- from the Grand Master. , (
' - !' & ( ;9 .99 - ! '!- '! - ' !' ! '!-
'! ( ;9 .9A.7( (-. - '! ! <! . 2!((. ! ,' 2 - ! '.
.(-!'
 /))

At Emulation Lodge of Improvement the I.P.M.

always rises in his place on the 'third rising,' stands to
0 . wi t h t h e Sp . a nd S n., a nd sa ys : 'H ear t y
Good Wishes, W.M.' This is so done in the
recognised Lodges of Instruction, and in many
regular Lodges which follow the Emulation system.
In Provincial Lodges it is a common custom on
the 'third rising' for Visiting Brethren to rise in
turn to tender 'Hearty Good Wishes' from their
respective Lodges. It has been widely stated that
such procedure is irregular, and a high official
connected with the. Grand Lodge, a late Grand
Registrar, gave it as his opinion that no Brother has
the right to convey 'Hearty Good Wishes' from a
Lodge unless he is the Master of that particular
Lodge, or has been especially authorised by the
Master so to do. As a matter of fact, Grand Lodge
has given no r uling o n the point. T he opinio n
quoted above would seem to be a sound one, but
Brethren will do well to be guided by local custom.

CALLING OFF AND ON

For the Ceremony of Calling the Brethren from
Labour to Refreshment (or Calling Off, as it is
generally known) the W.M. should give one H"
which is answered by the Wardens. T he W.M.
then says: 'Principal Officers upstanding,' when he
and his Wardens rise, the rest of the Brethren r e-
ma i ni n g se at ed . T he W .M. t he n as k s : B r o .
J.W., what time is it?' to which the J.W. replies:
`High time, W.M.' The W.M. asks: 'Your
d u t y ? ' t o wh i c h J . W . a n s we r s : 'T o c a l l t h e
/)"

B r et h r e n f r o m L a b o u r t o R e f r e s h me n t . ' T h e
W.M. says: 'I will thank you to declare it.' J.W.
t h e n a n n o u n c e s : ' B r e th r e n , i t i s t h e W . M . 's
command that you cease Labour and go to Refresh-
ment; keep within hail so as to come on in due time, that
profit and pleasure may be the result.'
The J.W. gives one [image], which is answered
first by the S.W. and then by the W.M. T he
I.P.M. should close the V.S.L. without moving the
S. and C.'s. T he J.W. raises his column and the
S.W. lowers his column. In many Lodges it is cus-
tomary for the J.D. to turn the T.B. over at this
point, but there is no precedent for such procedure
according to strict Emulation-working, as the
T.B. is not changed for the op enings and clo s-
ings in the different degrees at Emulation Lodge
of Improvement.
The Brethren being assembled in Lodge for the
Call from Refreshment to Labour (or Calling On),
the W.M. gives one , which is answered by the
W ar d e n s. W .M. sa ys : 'P r in cip a l O f f ice r s up -
standing,' when he and his Wardens rise, the rest
o f the B r ethr en r emain i ng seated . T he W .M.
asks: 'Bro. J.W., what time is it ?' to which the
J.W. replies: 'Past High time, W.M.' The W.M.
asks: 'Your duty ?' and the J.W. answers: To call
the Brethren from Refreshment to Labour.' The
W.M. says: I will thank you to declare it.' The
J.W. then announces: 'Brethren, it is the W.M.'s
command that you cease Refreshment and return to
Labour, for the further despatch of Masonic busi-
ness.'
The J.W. gives and lowers his column.
 )+

S.W. then gives and raises his column. The

W.M. then gives [image]. T he I.P.M. opens
t h e V.S.L. If the T.B. has previously been re-
versed, the J.D. attends to it.

RESUMING THE LODGE

The correct procedure for Resuming the Lodge is
as follows: The W.M. gives single f, which is
answered by t he Wardens. T he W.M. then
announces: Brethren, by virtue of the power in me
vested, I resume the Lodge in the . . . Degree.'
He then gives of the Degree into which the
Lodge is resumed. The Wardens give similar The
I.G. proceeds to the door and gives similar K.'s,
to which the T yler replies. I.P.M. adjusts the Sq.
and C.'s, and the J.D. attends to the T.B. F See
footnote to Appendix B, pp. 279, /45 with regard to
'muffled ' K.'s.)

THE CEREMONIES
To tabulate details for the Master's guidance in
all the Ceremonies would require far more space
than the writer has at his command. Perfection
can only come from careful study of the Ritual combined
with diligent practice in a reliable Lodge of Instruc-
tion.* T he few hints hereunder set out, however,
will be of assistance.
B !! : /00 , ' (- , ! (! 2;9.- A '?
!( , (-'; -
 0 ./ 01 2

T H E C E R E M O N Y O F I N I T I AT I O N
1.Prior to the Ob. the W.M. should exercise
great care in adjusting one p...t of the C.'s to the
Can.'s n.l.b.
2.The correct Sn. during the Ob. is the P.Sn. of
the Degree.
3.When making a certain movement during the
Ob. at the words ' hereby and hereon' the W.M.
should use his l.h., maintaining the P.Sn. with his
r.h. The word hele ' is pronounced 'HAIL.'
4.The correct point at which to dis. Sn. is
immediately the Can. has repeated the final words
of the Ob. [image1] The W.M. should remember to
remove the C.'s at this point.
5.Restoration to L...t. The importance of this
portion of the Ceremo ny has been stressed in
Chapter XVI, para. 8, p. 134, q.v. Perfect under-
standing between the W.M. and J.D. is essential.
The W.M. should hold his g.v.l aloft so that all may
see it. Three distinct and deliberate movements
should be made, i.e. across to the left, across to the
right, then down, the J.D. removing the h.-w. as
the W.M.'s g.v.l descends in the final movement.
6.When rising to communicate the Ss. of the
Degree to the Can. the W.M. should remember to
take the Sp. When communicating the G. or T.
to the Can. at this point it is the W.M. and not the
J.D. who adjusts the Can.'s (See footnote,
p. I C
) " ( )+(# %' +# %% 3
4 "( ( )+(# %( +# %% 3
5 "( ( )+(# %( % # + (*(% + 3 ( +" )# %
+
 1 / . /)0

7.Explanation of the W.T.'s. Unless the W.M.

be an expert ritualist it were better not to handle the
W.T.'s. The mere fact of doing so is often sufficient to
cause a lapse of memory. The W.M. does not
stand to explain the W.T.'s.*
8.The Charge after Initiation. If the Charge
is delivered by the W.M. he does not stand for this
duty.
T HE C E R E M O NY O F P AS S I N G
1.The correct Sn. during the Ob. in this Degree is
the Sn. of F. The W.M. should use his left hand for
a certain movement at the words ' hereby and
hereon,' maintaining Sn. of F. with r.h. The Sn.
should be discharged when the Can. repeats the
final words of the Ob.
2.The W.M. should remember to take the Sp.
when rising to communicate the Ss. of the Degree to
the Can.
3.The W.M. does not stand for the explanation of
the W.T.'s. (See para. 7 above.)
4.Explanation of the T.B. Upon the Can.'s
return to the Lodge the W.M. should wait until he
has been saluted and the S.D. has placed the Can. in
correct position at the foot of the T .B. T he
W.M. then leaves his ped. on the left-hand side and pro-
ceeds to the head of the T.B., where J.D. will hand
him his wand to point out the emblems. [image1]
) " ( )+(# %' +# %% 3
6(* 3 7 *++&,+&( +, - "!
/ )4

T HE CE RE MO NY O F R AI SI NG
1.The correct Sn. during the Ob. is the P.Sn.
of the Degree. The W.M. should use his left hand
for a certain movement at the words 'hereby and
hereon,' maintaining the P.Sn. with r.h. The cor-
rect moment to dis. Sn. is when Can. repeats final
words of the Ob. Do not forget to recover.
2.At the words Rise newly Ob. M.M.,' the
W.M. should use the right hand only.
3.At the words, ' when the villain who was
a.w.a.h.m.s.h.a.v.b.o.t.f.,' the W.M. should make a
motion with the M..l. He should not leave his seat
to touch Can.'s F...............d with the M..l.
4.The W.M. should remember that the Can.
o ught to be r..s.d o n the F.P.O.F. P ractice is
essential before this can be done correctly.
5 .Fo llo wing the co nclud ing wo r d s o f the
Charge' peace and salvation to the faithful and
obedient of the human race 'the W.M. takes both
the Can.'s h.'s in his own and moves slowly round
to the right until they occupy each other's places,
the W.M. facing the S. and the Can. facing N.
Even among experienced Preceptors there is often a
doubt as to the correct direction of this movement.
No mistake can be made if the W.M. remembers
that the mo vement sho uld be made in an anti-
clockwise direction.
6.During the T.H. the W.M. should not take
Sp. when he rises at the words ' one of the Brethren,
looking round, observed . .
7.Later, when the W.M. rises to demonstrate
the five Sns., then he should take the Sp.
 /)#

T HE C E R E M O NY O F I N S T AL L AT I O N
1.When signifying his assent with the Sn. of F.
to the Ancient Charges and Regulations read by
the Secretary, the M.-E. should remember that the
Sn. is dropped, not drawn.
2.When directed to advance to the ped. to take
the S. Ob. of M.-E., the M.-E. should not advance
until the I.M. has completed his sentence.
3.The correct Sn. during the Ob. is the Sn. of
F. The Sn. should be discharged when the M.-E.
repeats final words of the Ob.
4.The W.M. should not ' declare all Offices
vacant' at any period during this Ceremony. A
reference to Rule Book of Constitutions, will
show the only method by which a Master is em-
powered to displace an Officer. Under the Con-
stitutions no Master of a Lodge has the power simultane-
ously to displace all the officers by a mere declaration
that all Offices are vacant.*
5.The I.W. For obvious reasons detailed hints
cannot here be set down regarding this important
portion of the Ceremony. T he I.M., ho wever,
should remember that there should be no movement to
illustrate the words when he refers to the p...lty at
the end of the Ob. T he correct word here is
` s l u n g , ' n o t 'f l u n g ' a s i s s o o f t e n h e a r d . T h e
meaning of the sentence is that the h. shall be slung
over the l.s.i.e. suspended in a sling for all to see as
a visible mark of degradation.
6 .W he n t he B r et hr e n a r e r ead mi t ted a nd
, - .
 - ./ 01 2

directed to pass round the Lodge and salute the

W.M., they should not be told to do so 'in
passing.'*
7.The W.T.'s of each Degree should be ex-
plained in extenso by the I.M. If, however, the
W.T.'s of any Degree have already been explained dur-
ing the course of the meeting it is sufficient for the
I.M. to say : " Their uses and significations hav-
ing already been explained this evening, I will not
take up your time with a repetition."
8.The Lodge should be fully Closed in all
Degrees.
9.The Address to the newly installed Master at
the conclusion of the Ceremony should be given
from the W. at the left of the S.W. The Addresses to
the Wardens and Brethren should both be given
fr o m t h e E . , a t t he le f t o f t h e W . M. Ne it h er
the W.M. nor the Wardens should stand when being ad-
dressed.

GENERAL HINTS (DURING LABOUR)

1.T he W.M.'s fir st duty is to see that the
Warrant is in evidence. [image1]
2.In the event of a visit by the Grand Master,
the Pro Grand Master, or the Deputy Grand Master
(or, in a Provincial or District Lodge, by the Pro-
vincial or District Grand Master or his Deputy or Assis-
tant), the W.M. of a Private Lodge must tender his
gavel to the distinguished visitor, but to no other Grand
Officer however elevated in rank.*
, - -! : *"
Q 2. !*R & .:-!' 8 :.'. *# : //*
 THE WORSHIPFUL MASTER 241
3.A copy of the Book of Constitutions and of the
Lodge By-Laws should always be presented to each Ini-
tiate.*
4.If Minutes of more than one Meeting have
to be read they should be put for confirmation
separately. T he Master should not declare the
Minutes to be carried. A resolution is 'carried,'
but Minutes are confirmed.
5.If any of the proceedings at a Lodge Meeting ne-
cessitate the procuring of a Dispensation, such Dispen-
sation must be read in Open Lodge before the par-
ticular business is entered upon. In the case of a
Lodge actually meeting by Dispensation it is customary
for the Dispensation to be read immediately after
the opening of the Lodge. It is not correct for the
Dispensation to be read before the Lodge is
opened. The meeting is legalised not by the reading
of the Dispensation but by the fact that it has been
procured.
> H ! W.M. may summon a Lodge of Emer-
gency at any time, for which no Dispensation is
necessary. No other business save that stated on the
Summons may be entered upon at an Emergency Meet-
ing.[image1] Minutes are not read and the
W.M. does not rise to inquire ' if any Brother has
aught to propose . .
7.A collective ballot for more than one Can-
didate for Initiation is permissible; similarly for
Candidates for Joining. But ballots for Candidates
for Initiation and joining should be taken separately.
B !! & .:-!' 8 :.'. /* : ///
, !! & .:-!' : *0) ; !' ! ! '!-.'7 1 . :
/)* ; !' ! ( ( 1
/"/
The W.M. should be careful to assure himself that
the ' Nay' drawer is empty before the ballot-box
is circulated.*
8.In the case of any awkward situation arising
the W.M. has the power to suspend the proceedings
by the simple expedient of Calling the Lodge from La-
bour to Refreshment. Difficult situations have some-
times been overcome by adopting this course. Every
Master and J.W. should be familiar with the Ceremony
of Calling Off and Calling On. [image1]
9.No nominations are permissible for the Offices of
Master and Treasurer. These officers must be
elected by free ballot. The Tyler may be elected
by a show of hands.
GENERAL HINTS (DURING
REFRESHMENT)
10.The W.M. should remember that punctu-
ality is almost as important in terminating the pro-
ceedings of the evening as in commencing them, It
is a wise procedure to draft a time-tableand keep to
it! Custom dictates that certain toasts should be hon-
oured, however much we might like to dispense wi t h
th e m. A l e n gt h y mu s i cal p r o gr a m me i s gener-
ally a nuisance. It is better to cut down the musi-
cal programme than for late speakers to be com-
pelled to address empty seats.
11.Smoking must not be permitted until after
the toasts of ' T he Queen' and ' T he M.W. the
Grand Master.' This stipulation, however, does
not apply to the cigarette served with the sorbet. If
B !! & .:-!' 8 :.'. 22, p. 222. K !! : /))
 /")

a sorbet is served the W.M. should not give the loyal

toast at this stage. Such a custom is a modern
innovation as inconsistent as it is unauthorised. If a mid-
prandial cigarette is permitted the W.M. should see
that it is not lighted before the sorbet is served, nor
continued after that course is completed.*
12.If the custom of the Lodge dictates that the
W.M. should 'take wine' with various Brethren
during the banquet, he should always stand to do
so. Ordinary courtesy demands it, the W.M. being in
the capacity of host at the dinner-table. Politeness
also dictates that the Brother, or Brethren, with whom
the Master is 'taking wine' should stand. T he ver y
modern practice, when the Master is ' taking
wine' with ' All the Brethren,' for the toastmaster to
announce: 'The Brethren will remain seated ,' is
to b e r egr etted . Co mmo n co ur tes y surely demands
that the Brethren should rise to acknowledge the Master's
hospitable greeting.
13.It is not customary for Grand Officers to
r i s e wh e n t h e M a s t e r ' t a k e s wi n e ' wi t h 'T h e
Visitors.' Possibly the explanation is that these
eminent Brethren, having already been greeted by
the Master, should not be ' inconvenienced ' a
second time; but it is quite inaccurate to argue that a
Grand Officer is not a visitor. One sometimes
hears ingenious Brethren endeavour to explain that,
while ' ordinary' Brethren are ' visitors, ' Grand
Officers are ' guests 'a distinction without a differ-
ence.[ i mage1 ] T he tr uth is, o f co ur se, that a
visiti ng Grand Officer at the dinner-table is in exactly
the

B !! & .:-!' K !! , - -! : "

/ ""

same position as any other visiting Brother; he is a

guest being entertained by the Lodge. Save that
his rank ordains that he has a particular seat allotted
to him, and that he receives certain formal honours,
his privileges as a guest are the same as those of the
youngest visiting Entered Apprentice, no more and
no less.
14.The custom of ' toasting ' or ' challenging '
among the Brethren during the dinner is frequently car-
ried to excess, with the result that an undignified '
bear-garden ' atmosphere prevails. It is the duty of
the W.M. to exert his authority to insure that
there shall not be unseemly noise. Strict etiquette de-
mands that no Brother shall ' challenge' one of
senior rank. Consequently the W.M. may never be chal-
lenged.' The Board of General Purposes has called
attention to the regrettable habit of constantly ' chal-
lenging ' the Initiate. The W.M. should not per-
mit anything of the sort. The W.M. will be wise
if he does not let it be announced that he desires
visiting Brethren to ' make themselves at home' by
joining in the 'challenging.' In all probability there
will be quite enough noise while the practice is lim-
ited to members of the Lodge.
15.The W.M. should not permit Brother Organist
to introduce a paid artiste into the room to sing the
Natio nal Anthem as a so lo. T he Natio nal An-
them is an anthem, and, as such, it should be ren-
dered by the Brethren as a whole.
16.Every W.M. should exercise the most careful
supervision over the musical programme. No item
of a questionable or suggestive nature should ever
be permitted in a Masonic atmosphere. Nor, of
 245
course, should any Brother ever be permitted to tell a
story of such a nature. Unfortunately such a
thing so metimes happens, and the Master who
immediately exercises his authority will certainly
earn the respect and support of the Brethren.
17.Topics likely to give rise to argument or
vexation are better omitted from post-prandial
speeches. A spirit of harmony and fraternity should pre-
vail during the period of Refreshment; it should
never be permitted to assume the nature of a debate.
&
 MISCELLANEOUS MATTERS

CHAPTER XXVIII
& B

* ) ) * ) + Book of Constitutions, state the

procedure under which a Lodge of Instruction may
be held, but the guidance contained therein is
necessarily very brief. Rule 132 stipulates that no
Lodge of Instruction shall be held unless under the
sanction o f a regular, warranted Lodge, or b y
special licence and authority of the Grand Master. Fur-
ther, that the Lodge giving its sanction, and the Brethren
to whom the licence is granted, shall be answerable for
the proceedings, and responsible that the mode of
working adopted has received the sanction of the
Grand Lodge. Rule 1 ) 3 reminds us that notice of the
times and places of meeting must be submitted to
the Grand Secretary (or, in Provinces and Dis-
tricts, to the Provincial or District Grand Secre-
tary), and in Rule 134 it is laid down that Lodges
of Instruction must keep Minutes recording the
names of all Brethren present and of
B !! ::! E : /00 , ' (- , ! (! !( ,
(-'; -
/+5

Brethren appointed to hold office. In Rule 135

reference is made to the fact that a regular Lodge
may at will withdraw sanction from its Lodge of In-
struction. Not much helpful material here for the
use of Brethren seeking guidance as to the for-
mation and control of a Lodge of Instruction.
Obviously the first concern of a group of Brethren de-
sirous of forming a Lodge of Instruction is, in compli-
ance with Rule 13z, Book of Constitutions, to assure
themselves that they can obtain the sanction of a
regular Lodge. No actual warrant is necessary, the
Constitutions are complied with by a recording of the
sanctioning Lodge's permission in the Lodge Minute
Book. It is usual for such permission to be con-
veyed in a letter from the Secretary of the regular
Lodge to the Secretary of the proposed Lodge of
Instruction, and such letter (or a copy thereof)
may be framed, mounted, or otherwise preserved
for use as the ' Warrant' of the Lodge of Instruction.
Even before this important matter is disposed of,
the would-be Founders of the suggested Lodge of In-
struction will doubtless have given careful con-
sideration to other questions of equal importance. It
seems scarcely necessary to emphasise that there should
be absolute unanimity as to the particular mode of
working to be taught ; and, the decision arrived at,
it should be rigidly adhered to. Nothing can be more
detrimental to the harmonious and successful con-
duct of a Lodge of Instruction than
 !

for different Brethren to endeavour to introduce

varying systems of working. Any such practice, if
permitted, will inevitably result in chaos, and 'profit
and pleasure' will certainly be conspicuous by
their absence.
T h e s e l ec t i o n o f a c o m p e t e n t P r ec e p t o r i s
o b v i o u s l y a m a t t e r o f paramount i m p o r t a n c e .
Having elected their Preceptor, the Brethren should
give him their complete confidence and at all times
accept his ruling without question or resentment;
his very title signifies that from him they take their
law. As in the Regular Lodge the Master is the
p r e-emine nt aut ho r it y, s o in the Lo d ge o f I n -
struction the Preceptor's word should be the law
on all matters. If the Brethren find his law
unacceptable, then their only proper course is to elect
another Preceptor, or to seek instruction elsewhere.
The qualifications which contribute to the making
of a successful Preceptor are many and varied. It
goes without saying that he must be a master of the
ritual in all its branches, but much more is required
of him than a comprehensive knowledge of the
d i f fer e n t Cer e mo ni e s a n d L ec t ur e s. T h e P r e -
ceptor who is to obtain and retain the confidence of
his pupils must possess the natural gift of leader-
ship ; he must at all times be able to command, but
the commanding should be combined with a quiet
courtesy of demeanour, a pleasantness of manner
which will take the 'sting' out of the many correc-
tions he will be called upon to make.
/+/

Brother Preceptor, if he wins the confidence of his pu-

pils, will undoubtedly be consulted on multi-
farious points beyond the actual working of the Ceremo-
nies; he will be looked up to as a reliable 'authority.'
He should, therefore, be thoroughly acquainted
with Masonic etiquette, jurisprudence, and history.
Above all, he must possess the all too rare ability
to impart his knowledge to others. Comparison
has been made between the Master of a Lodge and the
Preceptor of a Lodge of Instruction ; it may be added
that the Preceptor's powers and responsibilities are
even greater than those of a Master.
The Officer next in importance to the Preceptor in
a Lodge of Instruction is the Secretary. While he
need not necessarily possess his colleague's mas-
tery of ritual, he should, if he is to discharge his
duties efficiently, be a past master in other d i -
r e c t io n s . H e mu s t b e a n e x p e r t o r g a n i s e r ,
courteous and patient in his dealings with some-
times troublesome Brethren, and, beyond all else, a tire-
less and willing worker. The meetings being held
at frequent intervals, generally weekly, the secr e-
tar ial d uties ap p er taining to a Lo d ge o f In-
struction are far greater than in a Regular Lodge. In
the happy and successful Lodge of Instruction the
Preceptor and Secretary should at all times work in
complete accord, but Brother Secretary should remem-
ber that the Preceptor is the Preceptor, and as such,
the paramount authority.
 & 253
The Preceptor and Secretary are assisted by a Com-
mittee, and there is wisdom in limiting the num-
ber of members elected to the Committee ; a large
Committee is unnecessary and may well prove more of a
hindrance than a help. In the recognised Emulation-
working Lodges of Instruction election to the
Committee pre-supposes that the Brother elected
is sufficiently expert at the ritual to be of practical
assistance to the Preceptor, and to act as his deputy
in his absence if called upon.
However expert a Preceptor may be, precepting is
always more than a one-man job. The Preceptor
will, of course, be following the Master's work
carefully, but he must be equally attentive to the
other Officers ; his attention must be here, there,
and everywhere. With it all he is, after all, only
human, and his brain is a human brain and not an
infallible machine ; an occasional moment of un-
certainty is inevitable, and, when that moment comes, it
is the Committee-man seated on the Preceptor's immedi-
ate left who should be ready and competent to render
the necessary assistance promptly and unobtrusively.
Smooth team-work should characterise the
Committee's efforts in every well-conducted
Lodge of Instruction, and nowhere is such effi-
cient team-work more strongly in evidence than in
the Emulation Lodge of Improvement and the rec-
o gnised E mulatio n-wo r king Lod ges o f Instruc-
tion.
In a Lodge of Instruction which hopes for a long
254 EMULATIONWORKING EXPLAINED
and successful career all the proceedings should be con-
ducted with as much regularity and formality as in a
Regular Lodge. As already mentioned, the Constitutions
stipulate that the Secretary must keep proper Minutes of
the proceedings, and the Constitutions further ordain that
such Minutes must b e p r o d uced if called fo r b y
the Gr and Master o r h is d ep uties, o r b y t he
Lo d ge gr anti ng it s sanction.
Rule 134, Book of Constitutions, not only directs that a
Lodge of Instruction shall keep proper Minutes, it
ad d s that the Mi nute s s hall r eco r d the names of
all Brethren appointed to hold Office. The election of
Master and the appointment of Officers for an ensuing
meeting are matters which should always be conducted
with proper formality.
In the recognised Lodges of Instruction the elec-
tion of Master always takes place on the Second Rising.
The procedure is as follows: The W.M. rises for the
second time to ask if any Brother has aught to propose . .
. ' whereupon the Preceptor (or any deputy who may be
acting as I.P.M.) rises with Sp. and Sn. and says:
W.M., I have pleasure in proposing (or `I beg to pro-
pose ') that Bro. S.W. occupy (or `take') the chair at our
next meeting.' Another Member of the Committee rises
with Sp. and Sn. and says: 'W.M., I have pleasure in
seconding (or I beg to second ') the proposition.' The
W.M. (no .) says: Brethren, you have
 & /++

-ward the proposition.* All those in favour will

signify in the manner usually observed among
Masons.' (The Brethren signify.) 'On the
contrary?'
T he W.M. then announces: 'Bro. S.W. (S.W.
rises at once with Sp. and Sn.),[image1] you
have been unanimously elected to occupy this
chair on ...day evening next. You will appoint your
Officers and lame the wo r k.' T he S.W . r ep lies:
'W .M. and Brethren, I thank you.' He then dis-
charges Sn., -esumes his seat, and appoints his Offi-
cers, or says: The Officers will follow in rotation,
and the work will be the . . . Ceremony and . . .'
The Officers ir e a l wa y s ap p o i nted at E mu l a -
tio n L o d ge o f Improvement. The procedure is
for the S.W. to ;ay: 'Bro. J.W. (J.W. rises with Sp.
and Sn.), will you occupy this chair on ...day
evening next ?' The J.W. answers : 'With pleas-
ure, Bro. Master-Elect,' then discharges Sn. and
resumes his seat. The S.W. says: 'Bro. S.D.
(S.D. rises with Sp. and Sn.), will you occupy
the J.W.'s chair ?' S.D. replies as above, dis-
charges Sn., and resumes his ;eat. S.W. proceeds :
'Bro. J.D. (J.D. rises with*
- ( D; -! (;:!',9; ;( , ' - ! .(-!' - (.7 P 1 '!- '! -
.( 3!! :' : (! 37 ' . (! ! 37 '
.- ' 3! !9! -! 1 !- !- ! '!- '! .<!
!.' - ! :' : ( - $ - !'! ( !! - '!:!.- -
- !'! ( . .::.'! - !E !:- - - ! ';9 <!
& .:-!' 8 :: 05 . 0+ A !'! - ( (-.-! - .- . '
2;9.- :'. - ! . C; ' !( not (-. - 5 A !
. '!((! 37 a (! ' ,, !' ;- - 2;(- 3! 3 ' ! 2
.- - ! ';9 - !'! <! '!,!'( - 2;9.- :'. - ! only
luring the actual Ceremonies.
/ +>

Sp. and Sn.) , will yo u a ct as S.D. ? ' Similar

procedure with remaining Officers.
The procedure for announcing the Ceremony for , r e-
hear sal is as fo llo ws : T he W .M. ( no -[ image] )
announces : Brethren, the Ceremony for rehearsal
this evening is that of . . and Bro. A.B. will act as
Candidate' (or ' I will thank some Brother to offer him-
self as Candidate '). The Brethren who rise to
offer themselves should not sho w Sn. If the
Ceremony named is that of Initiation, the Brother
selected as Candidate proceeds to the left of the
S.W., salutes the W.M., and retires to be p.p. If
the Ceremony for rehearsal be that of Passing or
Raising, the selected Candidate remains standing in
his place, and the J.D. or S.D. (according to the
Ceremony) should fetch him and conduct him to
the left of the S.W. There is no salute here prior to
the Master proceeding: ' Brethren, Bro. A.B. is
this evening a Candidate to be . . . '
In a Lodge of Instruction the First Rising should
be for propositions for new Members, the Second
Rising for the election of Master for the ensuing
meeting, and the Third Rising for other business.
Of course, if there should be any communication
from Grand Lodge to be read, it will be taken on the First
Rising as in a regular Lodge.
The nearer the 'atmosphere' of the Lodge of
Instr uctio n approximates to that of a Regular
Lodge, the keener will be the attention of the
Brethren and the smarter the work. The question
 & 257
of furnishing is, therefore, one of considerable
importance ; the furniture, working-tools, and other ap-
pointments should be as complete as possible.
This necessarily entails a rather heavy initial outlay
and possibly some sacrifice on the part of the
Founders, but the certain results are well worth
the cost. All Officers at a Lodge of Instruction
should wear Masonic clothing, aprons and collars
being provided from the funds for that purpose.
Other Brethren may reasonably be excused from
wearing Masonic clothing.
The question of a suitable meeting-place for a
Lodge of Instruction is a difficult one, and the
difficulty becomes more pronounced each year with
the co ntin ued exp ansio n o f the Cr aft. I n th is
connection Brethren in the Provinces are, in the
majority of cases, more fortunately placed than
those in the Metropolitan area. Many Provincial
Lodges of Instruction are able to meet in their
local Masonic Halls, often in the same room in
which they hold their Regular Lodges.
In London most Lodges of Instruction can find ac-
commodation only on licensed premises, the use of
the room being granted for a nominal sum by the licen-
see, who expects (perhaps not unnaturally) to attract
trade. Where such conditions obtain, the Commit-
tee of a Lodge of Instruction will do well to set
themselves rigidly against the practice of allow-
ing refreshment to be consumed in the Lodge Room
while the Lodge is open.
/+4

The debatable question as to whether smoking

should be permitted during the work in a Lodge of In-
struction is one which has given rise to wide-
spread discussion, and it is not here intended to
argue the pros and cons. In the recognised
Emulation-working Lodges of Instruction smoking is
strictly banned ; before the official recognition of the
Emulation Committee can be obtained, a Lodge of
Instruction must incorporate in its By-Laws a
clause that both smoking and refreshment in the
Lodge Room are prohibited while the Lodge is open
fo r b usiness. I n the major ity o f Lod ges o f I n-
str u ct io n s mo k i n g i s al l o wab l e; i n so me , u n -
fortunately, refreshment also. The present writer
has been Preceptor in Lodges which permit smoking,
as well as those where it is taboo, and he has to
confess that he did not find that the enjoyment of
tobacco in any way affected the keenness of the work.
But where pipes and cigarettes are allowed, the
Preceptor will be wise to rule that the Officers taking part
in the Ceremony should refrain from smoking.
An important question often arising in Lodges of In-
struction is as to whether a Brother who is not a sub-
scribing member of a Regular Lodge is eligible for
membership. The Board of General Purposes has
ruled that Lodges of Instruction are controlled in this
connection by Rule 127, Book of Constitutions. This rule
stipulates that a non-subscribing Brother shall not be
permitted to visit any Lodge more than once unless he
again becomes a subscribing member
 & /+#

of some Lodge, but that the rule does not apply to

the visits of a Brother to any Lodge of which he has
been elected art Honorary Member.* It is obvious,
therefore, that a non-subscribing Brother is not
eligible for membership, but the Lodge of Instruc-
tion may surmount the difficulty, if the Brethren
so desire, by electing the would-be member to
Honorary Membership.
A Lodge of Instruction should always have By-
Laws framed as carefully as those of a Regular
Lodge, and, if financial considerations will permit,
the By-Laws should be printed and circulated
among the members. The financial question is
often a difficult one in a Lodge of Instruction, but if
care is exercised it should be possible to make
ends meet with a Joining Fee of, say, 45. or 55.
(not an extravagant sum!), a Visiting Fee of 2s. 6d.,
and a weekly Attendance Fee of /( Many Lodges of
Instruction have an Annual Subscription in place of
the weekly Attendance Fee, but, where this is in-
sisted upon, the membership frequently suffers. The
wiser plan is to make the Annual Subscription optional,
and let those who prefer it pay the weekly Attendance
Fee instead.
Lodges of Instruction should meet as frequently as
possible if the members are to be kept together and
their enthusiasm maintained. Generally speak ing,
the most successful and popular Lodges of Instruc-
tion are those which meet weekly.
B !! & .:-!' 8 : //)
/>5

All the recognised Emulation-working Lodges of In-

struction issue a printed syllabus for the session,
from which a Brother may see at a glance the
Ceremony due for rehearsal on a given date. In
many other Lodges of Instruction there is no set pro-
gramme, and the Brother elected to the chair for
an ensuing meeting is at liberty to name the
C e r e m o n y h e wi l l r e h e a r s e . T h e E m u l a t i o n
practice of a set programme has much to commend
it. It is more businesslike, and, the Ceremonies
being taken in rotation, a Brother offering himself
as Candidate for any particular Ceremony knows
that if he progresses through the offices week by
week he will reach the Master's chair six weeks later to
rehearse the same Ceremony.
In nearly all the recognised Lodges of Instruction Sec-
tions from the Lectures * find a regular place in the
syllabus. The Masonic Lectures are heard all too
seldom; they provide a useful medium for im-
pressing the ritual of the various Degrees on the
minds of the Brethren, and afford much valuable in-
struction and explanation not to be derived from the
actual Ceremonies. The Preceptor who hesitates
to introduce the Lectures into his curriculum in the
belief that he will have difficulty in inducing Brethren
to learn them should not be too easily discour-
aged. An excellent plan is to devote an occasional
evening to the working of a Lecture, and to invite the
attendance of a team of expert Lecture-
* !! & .:-!'( .
 0

workers to deliver the various Sections.* T he

interest of the Brethren may be awakened by such a
demonstration, and Brother Preceptor may be
pleasantly surprised to find that in the near future
many of his pupils are eager to make their debut as Lec-
ture-workers.
In addition to the Ceremonies and Lectures there
are many ways by which a Preceptor may stimulate
the interest of his pupils. A Lodge of Instruction,
as its name implies, sho uld be a Lodge where
Brethren may expect and receive instruction apart
from the actual Ritual. Brief addresses by the
Preceptor, or some other competent Past Master,
o n miscellaneo us matters o f gener al Maso nic
interest are always welcome. It is also an excellent prac-
tice for the Preceptor to invite queries from the
Brethren at all meetings, a plan which will un-
doubtedly result in many interesting and instructive
discussions. Brother Preceptor, however expert he
may be, cannot be expected to know everything ; no
doubt at times he may meet with a query that '
floors ' him, but, if his heart is in his task, he can
al wa ys ' find o ut ' and r ep o r t at a sub seq uent
meeting.
A final word of advice to Brother Preceptor is that
/ '( %8&'+$ '%1 +$6%,21(5 4%,: 187' 5(4+,1&$%&2+,1 +* ( 7& 8 $(
= + $E2, 6 % , 5 ' % 1 % * & ( $= % $5 1 ' % 5 & ' ( - 9( % 18 $( + * 9(%$,2,6
&'%& &'(: '%5 ;(,(*272%9 (**(7& ( =299 ;( -9(%1(5 %& % , : & 24 (
& + % $$% , 6 ( 18 7 ' % 5 ( 4 + , 1& $% & 2+ , % & % + 5 6 ( + * ,1&$87&2+,
2* 7+448,27%&(5 =2&' &'$+86' &'( -8;921'($ +* &'21 %,8%9
/>/

he should make his teaching as individual as possible.

The Preceptor who endeavours to take a personal
interest in the efforts of his pupils will earn not only
their confidence and respect, but their friendship
and affectio n. I t is b y such metho d s that the
Preceptor will make his Lodge of Instruction what
every such Lodge should be, a weekly assembly of a
happy band of Brothers, all imbued with the one aim
to fit themselves to discharge their duties in their
respective Lodges with that dignity, decorum, and
accuracy which should be the distinguishing mark
of all Masonic Ceremonial.
 CHAPTER XXIX
B

what precise point during the post-prandial

period may permission be granted for the Brethren to
smoke, in conformity with the generally accepted rules
of Masonic etiquette and courtesy ? It is a safe
prophecy that in the majority of cases such per-
mission is anxiously awaited by a large per-
centage of Brethren eager for the solace and enjoy-
ment of the fragrant weed which William Lilye, the fa-
mous fifteenth-century grammarian, styled 'our holy
herb nicotian.'
The exact point at which permission may be
given for Brethren to ' light up' did not enter the
range of controversy until very recent years. That it
has now become a subject of controversy there can
be l ittle doubt; varying opinions are advanced, each
one claiming to be authoritative, and acrimonious
disputes have arisen among the several champions of
ceremonial etiquette who find themselves at variance.
Some there are who declare that
B (- , - ! 2.-!' .9 - ( .:-!' A.( 9; ! .
.'- 9! 37 - ! .;- ' ! - -9! @ '!- '! ; .7 2 ?! @ :;3
9( ! The Freemason )' <!23!' *#/4 . A '!:' ; !
!'! 37 - ! ;'-!(7 , - ! ! - ' , - .- C ;' .9
/>)
/>"

smoking is permissible as soon as the toast of ' The

Grand Master' has been honoured ; others that it
should be deferred until after the toast of ' The
Grand Lodge Officers' has been submitted; still
others who stoutly aver that adherents to My Lady
Nicotine must hold their desires in check until
the last-mentioned toast has been responded to. A
few sticklers go even further and withhold the ea-
gerly awaited permission until the toast of The Provin-
cial Grand Master' has been received. This extreme,
however, applies only in the case of a few Provinces
and scarcely comes within the scope of a chapter
dealing with generalities.
I f disp uting Br ethren base their r espective
opinions on the observance of correct etiquette,' it
is interesting to examine the word itself. The
word is French, and the old French estiquette or
estiq u et meant a 'label' or ticket.' Randle Cot-
grave, the Cheshire lexicographer, whose French-
English dictionary, published in the second decade of
the seventeenth century, is still a work of valuable his-
torical importance, explained the word in French as a
billet' for the benefit or advantage of him that receives
it; a form of introduction. Also, as a notice
fixed at the gate of a court of law. T he develop-
ment of meaning in French from a ' label ' to ceremonial
rules' is not difficult to follow. For our purpose the gen-
erally accepted definition of the word in its broad sense
may be taken to mean the correct social observances
required by good breeding.'
 />+

Obviously ' good breeding' and 'social obser-

vances ' may be assumed to embrace loyalty to the
T hr o n e an d d ue a nd b e co mi n g r e sp ec t to t he
reigning monarch. Hence an assembly of gentle-
men d inin g cer e mo nio u sl y wh et her the y b e
members of our Fraternity or notrefrain from
smoking until after the toast of 'The Queen,' on any oc-
casion when it is customary to honour the loyal
t o a s t . L o ya l t y a n d p r o p e r s u b mi s s i o n t o t h e
T hrone have dictated the custo m. It would be
superfluous to emphasise that members of the Craft
yield first place to no section of society in the
matter of loyalty to the Sovereign. Here, then, we
have the indisputable, basic fact, upon which all
Brethren will be in agreement, that cigars and
cigarettes must remain unlighted until after the
loyal toast.
As the Queen is the supreme ruler of all who owe al-
legiance to the flags of Britain, her Dominions and
Dependencies, so the M.W. the Grand Master is the
supreme ruler of all Brethren attached to Lo d ges
und er the E nglish Co nstitutio n. Here again we
have sure guidance ; loyalty and respectful sub mission
to the Grand Master indicate that, among Free-
masons, smoking is taboo until the second toast
on the list has been received with customary hon-
ours.
Of recent years the question has been complicated by
the new-fangled assertion that the cigarette
which many like to enjoy with a sorbet is 'out of
/>>

order' unless the toast of 'The Queen' has first

b een ho no ured. W hence came this so mewhat
dogmatic interference with long-established cus-
tom ? What vestige of authority have the voluntary
champions of etiquette for their dogmatism ? For
many years the cigarette served with the sorbet has
been an accepted custom, and not until the past
three or four years has a hint ever been heard that
the harmless custom outraged decency or loyalty.
There is little doubt that a general consensus of
opinion would be to the effect that smoking is
permissible directly after the Grand Master's toast
has been honoured. As already mentioned, there
are a few scrupulous sticklers in some Provinces
who would strain the loyalty and patience of the
Brethren by withholding permission until after the
toast of ' The Provincial Grand Master,' but such
extremes are few and far between. A Province is
entitled to establish its own customs, however ar-
bitrary they may appear at first sight. One can
only sympathise with the Brethren compelled to
submit to such capricious dicta.
The whims of faddists are notoriously infectious.
Let the self-appointed advocates of any artificial
reform shout loudly enough, and some will be found to
accept them at their own valuation. Hence has
sprung up in many directions the incongruous
custom of giving the loyal toast in the middle of
the banquet. In all spheres of life one is some-
times surprised to note how many are to be found
 267
willing to follow blindly the lead of self-constituted
p io neer s o f so -c al led r e fo r m. I t is s ti ll mo r e
surprising to find that in the Masonic 'Calendar ' of
one of the most influential Provinces it is definitely
laid down that:
" If, in the middle of dinner, the Brethren want to
smoke with the sorbet, the Master should then give
the toast of ' The Queen' to allow them to do so."
To all save the slavish purist the mid-prandial
cigarette is an accepted accompaniment of the
sorbet, one which may be enjoyed with that dainty,
not to be lighted before the sorbet is served, nor
retained after it is finished. It is not intended nor
regarded as a smoke per se; therefore its transient
intrusion is not generally viewed as an infringement
of the ruling already stated, viz. that an assembly
of gentlemen, dining ceremoniously, refrain from
smoking until after the loyal toast.
The incongruity of the direction quoted from a Provin-
cial 'Calendar ' is apparent at a glance. The proposing
of the loyal toast by the Master in the middle of
dinner conveys tacit permission to the Brethren
that they may smoke freely and without restraint,
irrespective of the sorbet or any other accompaniment,
quite heedless of the universally accep ted r estr ic-
tio n that s mo ki n g ma y n o t b e indulged in at any
Masonic gathering until after the t o a s t o f ' T h e
M . W . G r a n d M a s te r . ' I f i t i s a contravention of
the canons of etiquette to indulge
/>4

in a few whiffs with the sorbet before the loyal toast, it

is equally a violation of those canons to do so
prior to the toast of the Grand Master. However
arbitrary a command may be, one may accept it
with good grace if it has the merit of consistency;
there is nothing consistent in the example quoted.
The regrettable consequence of this new-born
custom of giving the loyal toast in the middle of
dinner is to be seen in many directions. Brethren
whose appetites are already assuaged continue
smoking during the remainder of the meal, and their fla-
grant defiance of all accepted rules of courtesy often
passes unchecked by those self-same' guardians of eti-
quette' who throw up their hands in punctilious hor-
ror at the sight of a spiral of tobacco-smoke during the
consumption of the sorbet unless the loyal toast has
first been submitted.
The great body of the Craft is admittedly loyal to
the expressed wishes of its rulers. Uncertainty and
confusion would be banished by a direct hint from
the usual recognised quarter from which all Ma-
sonic authority emanates. In the absence of any
such hint, common sense and ordinary courtesy would
seem to dictate that the toast of The Queen' is en-
tirely out of place until after Grace has been of-
fered.
 CHAPTER XXX
& 1

1 if you are the Master of a Lodge, wear

your Master's Collar and Jewel when visiting.
Such a practice is contrary to the Constitu-
tions.
1 be slovenly with your Sns. Remember that
all Sq....s, L....s, and P.rp....c...rs are true and
proper Sns. to know a Mason by. Remember,
too, that all Masonic Sns. should be given
silently.
1 make any preliminary pointing ' motion when
giving the P.Sn. of an E.A. The r.h. should be
brought direct to position with the th.ex.i.t.f.o.a.
Sq.t.t.l.o.t.w.-p.
1 forget the difference between the Sn. of R.
and the Sn. of F. In the latter the th. is sq....d
and the Sn. is drawn. In the former the th. is
not sq....d and the Sn. is dropped.
1 forget that when discharging the P.Sn. in
any Degree the h. sho uld be kep t op en. 1
omit to 'recover' the P.Sn. of the Third
269
/05

Degree. There is only one exception to this

rule. (See para. p. 23o.)
1 forget the Sp. before any Sn., with the single ex-
ception of the Sn. of R. Actually this is not a
Masonic Sn. It would be more accurately de-
scribed as the attitude of R.
1 propose a Candidate for Initiation unless you
feel absolutely certain that he is the right man,
not only for Freemasonry, but also for membership
of your particular Lodge. You will be wise to
make it a rigid rule never to propose a Candidate
unless he is an intimate friend whose character you
know thoroughly.
1 when you are Master, permit any adjourn-
ment to another room during the Installation
Ceremony for the purpose of permitting the
members of the Board of I.M.'s to partake of re-
freshment. In March 1926 the practice was con-
demned by the Board of General Purposes as ir-
regular and a contravention of the undertaking
given to the Home Secretary in *#5/ b y the
Grand Registr ar that the Maso nic authori-
ties would condemn the practice of consum-
ing any intoxicating liquors in Lodge, or on
premises directly associated with the Lodge, in con-
nection with the Ceremony of Installation. It is to
be regretted that some otherwise well-conducted
Lodges continue flagrantly to violate this ruling.
 . ! /0*

1 permit your Lodge Committee to be styled

your 'Board of General Purposes' if you have in-
fluence to prevent it. The Book of Constitutions
limits the use of the title Board' to certain
bo dies sp ecified therein. ' Stand ing Co m-
mittee' or Lodge Committee' are the descrip-
tions which should be employed by advisory
bodies in private Lodges.
1 frame your Grand Lodge Certificate and
publicly exhibit it on your business premises,
even in your private office. Such a practice can only
be interpreted as an endeavour to turn Freema-
sonry to commercial advantage, and is em-
phatically deprecated by the Masonic authori-
ties.
1 talk to your immediate neighbours during
the progress of a Ceremony in Lodge. The
slightest whisper sometimes carries much
further than the whisperer realises. Remember
that the Master is concentrating on his task, and
he may be nervy; the slightest interruption
may throw him right out of his stride. ,
1 ever laugh, or even smile, if there is an
amusing hitch in the work during a Ceremony.
We do hear and see some amusing happenings
at times, but any hint of mirth may utterly
destroy those solemn impressions which should
be created in the Candidate's mind.
1 9 99 and sprawl in your seat in Lodge even
/0/

if you happen to be feeling weary and, per-

ch a nce, so me wh at b o r e d . Yo u ma y h a ve
hear d it all a hundr ed times, b ut it is the
Candidate's first time; his interest will un-
doubtedly be stimulated if the Brethren are in-
terested.
1 be in too much of a hurry to join a number of
Lodges, or to enter the ' Side' Degrees. Pause to
consider the financial aspect. Remember that
Masonic expenditure should always be `with-
out detriment,' etc.
1 hesitate to enter the Order of the Holy Royal
Ar ch. T his is n o t a ' Si d e' Degr ee, it is a
p ar t o f 'p ure Antient Maso nr y.' ( See P re-
liminary Declaration, B. of C.)
1 sp ea k o f O f f ic er s o f Lo nd o n R a n k a s '
Lo ndon Ranker s.' It is d iscourteo us and of-
fensive.
1 if you are an Officer of London Rank or of Pro-
vincial or District Grand Rank, attend an Installation
Meeting in Undress Regalia.
1 make the work of the Treasurer or Secretary
harder by neglecting to reply promptly to their
communications.
1 forget that the Tyler is a ' Brother.' A hand-
shake and a cheery word of greeting may mean
much to him.
1 presume upon your Masonic association with
those in a higher social station than yourself.
 & 1 /0)

1 be stand-offish in your Masonic association

with those in a lower social station than your
own. We meet on the square, and part on the
level.
1 wear Masonic charms on your watch-chain,
or as any other form of personal adornment. It
simply 'isn't done.'
1 indulge in noisy behaviour at the banquet.
You would not shout across the room at a
private dinner-party. Why do it at a Masonic
dinner ?
1 talk or move about the dining-room while
an artiste is on the platform. The musical enter-
tainment may at times be of rather indifferent
quality, and many of us may wish that it could be
dispensed with; but, when such an entertainment is
provided, common courtesy demands that the ar-
tistes should be granted silence and the undi-
vided attention of their audience.
1 address the Master as 'Worshipful Sir' either at
Labour or Refreshment; it should always be 'W o r -
ship f ul Ma ster.' And 1 ever b e guilty
o f addr essing the Master as W .M.' Abbrevia-
tions such as W.M.," S.W.,' etc., are permissible in
printing, but no Officer should ever be addressed
orally by an abbreviated title.
1 ever tell (or encourage) questionable anec-
dotes in a Masonic atmosphere.
/0"

[Under date 12th June 1933, the M.W. Grand

Master, in response to a suggestion sub-
mitted to him by the M.W. Pro G.M.,
granted authority for white waistcoats to 3!
worn with Evening Dress at Masonic as-
semblies, at the discretion of Provincial and Distr ict
Grand Masters and Master s o f Lo d ges. A
b lack waistco at is, ther e fo r e, no longer obliga-
tory.]
1 forget that 'Morning Dress' means Morning
Dress, not a light Lounge Suit. Brethren who
should know better sometimes err in this con-
nection.
1 become a 'knife and fork' Mason; you had
better drop out altogether.
1 criticise the Preceptor at your Lodge of
Instruction even though you may consider
him too autocratic, or perhaps incompetent. R e -
me mb e r t h a t h e i s d o i ng h i s b e s t a nd that
he is giving his time to try and assist his Brethren.
1 if you are an expert ritualist, be too ready to
condemn the Brother who is not. Remember
that we cannot all be 'stars.'
1 condemn any practice as wrong because it
happens to be contrary to the custom of your
own Lodge, or because it differs from that
which you have been taught in your Lodge of
 & 1 275
Instruction. Remember that your custom may be
the wrong one.
1 imagine that word-perfection of Ritual is
the Alpha and Omega of Freemasonry. It is
important, but there are other things far more impor-
tant.
1 think that you have done something extra-
ordinarily clever if you win the silver match-
box at the Emulation Lodge of Improvement. It
simply means that you have a good memoryand
that you have had some luck.
1 forget the first of the Three Grand Principles
upon which our Order is founded. Keep that
Principle ever in mind and ' Profit and Pleasure'
will be the result.
 8 - -9!( /0) ' ! '!! *5/ *5)
3(! ! , .(-!' *#4 *## *)) *)+ *)4 *"" *#+
/ > *#> /5) / " /)4
3(! ! , ,, !'( 44 *++ ,' 2 !(- - .(- !
//0 ! '!! *"+
;'. 7 , '! ' *0) *0" ,' 2 !(- - .(- '
/*) ! '!!
'!((!( &!'!2 .9 0 . - :! '(- ! '!!
*>/ */0
'!((!( (-.99.- /"5 S 9.'2(1 ' S !: '-( 1 4"
C ;' ! . - *#/ S 99 .' ! 1 *#
*#) S 99 : ' . (-'!((!
2 (( !2. #) .( ( 1 4*
*#" 92 !' *** **" *"#
2 (( , &. .-!( =!A!9 ,
#" 92( ( */#
#> *55 *5/ */> *)5 2:- 99 ' )+
*)/ *)" *)# *") *"> ! - & .' !( .
*"0 *"4 ! ;9.
2 (( , '. ,, !'( - ( *05 /)#
.,-!' :! *+# 2( S ! -( 1 '. ! ,
( , < ( - '( *+# 2( /+ /#
( '!,;( /*+ <. ! !'( ' =.2!( ++
.( . & *)# <. ! .( . ! -!( D;!(- .39!
.( *"" <. !2! - 37
' -.- *" /"+ /0)
*5+ 30 9! , - ! D;.'! *))
1 <. 1 37 &. .-!( ; !2! - , &. .-!(
*)# 4" *5 *5) *#) *#> 1
,' 2 '(- - ! ! (A!' 1 */0
'!! *5* * / *)* -!' 2 4+ */+ *++
*)) *"" *"0 *#" *#+ - !2 .- .9 /""
/ / /5) /)0
S <. 1 ,' 2 ! -
/4"
- ! - & .' !( *" . ! 2;(- 3! '!2 <! /5)
- ! - . 2.'?( *4> / "
- D; -7 ! , +> . .2 >/
::!.9 -5 !' .;- ' -7 .99 -( *// /// //) /"*
/*" /"/
::! !( /00 /4/ .99 -( . ; !2! - ,
::9.;(! .( *>/ //)
:: -2! - , ,, !'( *5+ .99 -( 99! - <! //) /"*
*5> .99 -( !. ( .--! -
:' A ! A ' ; !' - ! */*
.- *++ .99 -( - ! !((.'7 , '
' 97 7.9 /0/ '.'7 !23!'( //)
'- 9!( , /> "* . D;!- *>0 *>4 *4# /5#
'- (-!( ;'-!(7 - /0) /*5 /0)
'- (-!( :' ,!(( .9 /"" ! .< ;' *4# /*5 /"" /0*
/0) /0/ /0)
1 ((!239. ! , '!- '! 1 *+ 9. ? = = )/ 40
(( (-. - '! - ' , &!'! 9. ? - !( /0"
2 !( * * * **"T *> .' , ! !< 9! ! /5>
*+0 *>> *>0 .' ( '. .' (
: (- ! *+0 .' ( .9 *4#
( ;9 3! . **+ 0# 40
(( (-. - ' < .9 '. E5+ *54 **" *"# *+*
.(-!' < ( - 37 /"5 *+4 *0) *0+ *4* *4>
(( (-. - ! '!-.'7 *5+ *50 *#4 /5+ /50 /*/ /*"
**/ **" /*4 //5 /// //" //>
=!A!9 , * + /)# /"* /"# /+5 /+"
--! . ! .- '. ! /+4 /0* /0/
*)0 *44 //+ A - - ! *55
--! . ! ? 4> *++ ' -
*0/ //" 1 ' - ' -.' 1 *")
-- -; ! , !<!'! ! /05 ' (- 9 A '? /"
;- ' (! -;.9 /" /+ )+ '-( ! /#
/4* /4/ ' . , - 9 : +0
;99 9 : & *+5
;'9 - ! #5
.'. -!' /*+ 7 .A( - 3! (;::9 ! -
. ! , . & *"> /5/ &. .-!( /// /"*
. ! , . .( */# *##
/5*
. ! , . .(-!' .( & $ */4
*") /5" &. ; !;( *)>
. ! , !<!'7 .( *## &.99 ,, . *#/ *#0
. ! , ! ! *## *#4 /)) /)" /)+ /"/
 /4 +
&.99 - ! ! ,' 2 &. .-!F(G : ( - , '
.3 ;' - !,'!( 2! - (! *)) *"0
*#4 /)) /)" /)+ /"/ : (- , ' '. - .9
&.9<!'- "5 "* "> +5 (- '7 *")
&.2:3!99 <!' ! W . :'!(! ! , . 4"
/4/ :'!(! -.- , / ) /5"
&. .-!F(G . 2 (( , :' : ( - , //" /0
#" #+ #> *5 * ) */> .( , *5/ *5) *))
*)5 *)/ *)" *)# *") *)" *)+ *)4 *"" *#+
"" 47, *"4 *#> /5) /5"
. <. !2! - */0 *)" '!: '- , #) *5/
*)# *"* *"" *"+ *"> *#) *#" *#>
* "4 ( ;9 .9A.7( 3! .99 A!
. ; , #" *55 +5) - 9!.<! - ! !-
*#) *
#" *#> '!(- '! 2(!9, *)5 *"/
.A. - . 2 (( #) /0# +"0
/45 ( ;9 '! ! <! 7 .A(
3.99 - , ' /// //) /// /"*
3!(- 2!- , -' 99 A ! '!: '-! .( S ' 1
*/> #" /5
.'! ! !((.'7 :' : ( A ! ; !' .(-!'1(
/05 -' 9 4 *">
'! - ( - */5 &.(- < -! /*"
! -';(- */4 *)* *)4 &!'!2 .9 . '!(( *>* *>/
*"" *"> *#" *#+ /5/ &!'!2 !( See under
/)> /)0 1 - .- 1 (-.99.- 1
!E.2 .- ( */# *)* *)4 1 .(( 1. 1 .( 1
*"* *"" *"+ *"> *#" &!'- , .-!( - - 3! :;39 97
*#+ *#> /55 /5)
!E 3 -! /0*
, '(- 2:'!(( ( */" */+ & .9?9!7 )/ )) +*
, ' - .- 4" 4+ 1 & .99! 1 *4# /""
, ' .(( 4" & .:9. *"# *04 *4* 4L
, ' .( 4" *4) *4" /54 //4
- .- , *55 sox, C!A!9 , *4* *4/
*/> *)* *"0 *"4 *#) : (- , 4L
*#" /
55 /5* /)> /)0 & .' ! .,-!' - .- *)
<!(- -;'!( */# *") *"> *)* *4) /)0
/5* /5/ /5" & .' ! -!'';:- , 37
!'< ;( */+ 1 .<!9 0)
.(( , *5* *5/ *)* & .' -7 E **/
*)) *"" *"+ *"> *"0 & .'2( .( /0)
*#" *#+ /5/ / ) /)0 & !D;!( *0#
: (- , ' & .' ! *)5 & ;' 99 ' -= *)*
:! !' "0
/4>
&9.'! .'- ++ ! 9.' ,, !( <. . - *>+
&9 ( ! * # /)* /)#
&9 ( - ! ! ! !'.997 1 !2. 1 . 2 (( #)
## /54 /)" #"
- ! ! ! '!! ## !2!. ;' ! /0*
/)* /0/
- ! ' ! '!! #4 1 !:;-71 v. 1 (( (-. - 1 **"
## /)5 /)* !:;-7 (-' - '. .(
&9 - .( *++ *>0 -!' < ( - 37 3
& 99! - <! 3.99 -( //) /"* !:;-7 '. .(-!' < ( -
& 2:.((!( 4# #+ #> *5) 37 /"5
*+# /54 //# /)> !:;-7 ' < .9 '.
& 2:.((!( 2!- , ' .(-!' < ( - 37 /"5
- .::97 #+ !(. ;9 !'( ' = 1++
& 2:.((!( ( ;9 : - - 1 ,,!'! !(1 - ! !
A.' ( /54 //# *4) *4"
& 2:9!-! ! ' 9 !'( ,,!'! !( , A '? 05 0+
(- , >) >" 1 ! & 99.'( 1 *>L
& , '2.- , ;-!( *0) !' C. ?!-( ( ++ /0"
/*/ /*) /"* '! - 'F(G , &!'!2 !( >4
& :!' ) )* 4/ 4) 44 4# **) **>
& ' - . ' !' *#/ *"# *># *4> *# //0
& ' ; : . 4# .3(! ! , .- 2;9.-
&' - (2 , 2;9.- >0 *"# *+"
># 05 .3(! ! , :' <.-!
&' ((! A ' ( # !( *+ *+*
&'; !, E ' "" *+* ' - (2 , *"#
&;,, ? ?( /0# /4 ;- !( .- !,'!( 2! - *>0
&;23!'9! ! &! 9 *+ *>4
! !'.9 -( , ' *++ *>4
2;(- 3! . *+)
, !!- ( *#/ : (- ! ++0
.A( )/ D;.9 , .- ( , *+/ *+)
!. ( 44 #+ * 5 *5/ (:! (.- ( *>0 /"*
* ) **0 */) *+# (:9. . ,, !' /*4
=!A!9( , **0 *)> *)0 (:;-!( *4) *4"
2.?! ' 2.' - ! &!'! (-'!((! '!- '! 2
!( **4 (-' - '. .(-!' < ( -
2;(- ? A - ! -;.9
" 37 /"
(-' - '. . ? *+0
See also under ' =; ' *+# *>* *>0 /5# /0/
!. 1. 1 ! ' 1 -1( 1 .( /># /0+
!. 1 ' ,- ! ! #* #/
!.- , .(-!' * 4 /5> : (- , - ! #/
 /40
' ' !' *#4 2;9.- 2.- 3 E > >"
; 9.( '. ? )) /0+
<! . 9 <! '. **0 2;9.- ;-!( !(-' 7!
*)> >+
A9!7 = )5 )* )/ 2;9.- ! '!-.' !( )"
1 '.A 1 < 1 ' ::! 1 /)# 2;9.- (7(-!2 *0 /"
/># /+ )* 4" **# *>+ +>"
'.A (A ' #+ *0 /4*
'!(( *>* /0" 2;9.- '!.(;'!'( )) )"
'!(( !<! *++ /0" 2;9.- A '? ' - (2
'!(( 2 ' *++ /0" , >0 ># 05
1 ' ::! 1 < 1 '.A 1 /)# -!'-. 2! - ( 9! ! ;'
/># /0)
; ?!'9!7 2.( ++ - D;!--! .( - (2 ? /"/
/") />) />" />4
; 9 "0- ' : (- ,
, /># / +
9! -! ,, !'( 4/ *04 <! '!(( *+# /0"
9! - , .(-!' /*/ /"/ E 9;( :!'2. ! - /*>
9! - , .(-!' . '!. /*0
(;'!' /"/ E 9;( -!2: '.'7 /*+
239!2 , 9! -7 4* /*>
239!2 , !(-'. - 4# E 9;( . E:;9( /*0
2!' ! 7 !!- ( *0) E '-.- ' ! '!!
*#/ /"* *)+ *"/
2:9 7!'1( .3 9 -7 *0> E:! -;'! .( /0/
2;9.- ,,!'! !( ,' 2 E:!'- -;.9 (-( /0"
0 0+ E:;9( /*0
2;9.- .- (I *0 )
2;9.- . - ! '. /54
-!A.' ( )* "> ( , /)4
2 ;9. - & 22 --!! ; ! 2.( )/ )) )"
/+ /# )) "5 +# >> +* /4E
2;9.- ! -;'!( "0 +) '(- '!.- - //#
2;9.- ! , 2:' <! '(- 2:'!(( ( */" */+
2! - I I , */ *0 )) '! & (- -;- ( 8(
)0 " ") "+ "> +5 +>
5 - '( ,' 2 *>
+# >0 #* *// *)* *)" 1 ;'- ! '!! 1 *44
*)4 *"# *+* *+/ *>/ '. ? = J )"
*>" *>> //4 /0+ /00
/4* ' *>5 /)
-' 9 , *0 )* )) >+ ' 22; .- ,
.-! , , ; /" */#
(- '7 , /" )" .<!99 !.<7 *4#
/44

9?!( !-!' /4 /# ) )* !22 .2;!9 "* +*

)/ )) )# "/ +0 +# 9 <!( ++ +>
A -! +++ !'2!( *)>
'. '! - 'F(G , &!'! .'<!7 = ))
2 !( ++5 *+* *>) !E-.99 )5
*>4 '.2 3 ,, *#/
'. ! ;-!( /+ 4/ '.2 , 7'! *54
'. .(-!' < ( - 37 /"5 ?9!7 +*
'! ! < 22; .- ( 97 7.9 ' /0/ '
,' 2 /)/ .'7 !23!'( //) //" /+#
'. ,, !'( ! -!' .,-!' (-.-;( , //) //" /+#
! ( :! *+# 1 '.'71 ! '!-.'7 *0>
:'! ! ! ! , *+4 *>5 ;- ( 99 .2 ++
*>/
' -( , #) /") /"" & >0 / > /*+
(.9;-!( - *> *>* 22! .-! .(- .(-!' #>
(!.- .- !,'!( 2! - *>0 *// *>) *>" *>> *4/
*>4 *#+ /5) / + /5> /50
(!.- ! *+4 *+# /54 /5# /*5 //4 //#
- -9!( , *>* *>/ /0# /45
'. -!A.' ( . 2;9. 22! .-! .(- .(-!'
;- !( .- !,'!( 2! -
- )0 )4 )# "5 "*
" ") "" "+ "> "0 "4
/ /5# /*5
"# +5 +* +/ ( - ! =; ' .(- .(-!'
'. -!A.' (1 ! )0 )4 /5+
)# "5 "* "/ ") "" "+ =!A!9 , /5+
"> "0 "4 "# +5 +* +/ -. ,, !' /5+ / 5#
++ +> +# : (- , / +
1 '!!- (1 < 1 .9;-!( 1 *>*
- .- &!'!2 7 33.
*5* */> *) . *"0 *"4
*>)
'! ,!99 = '. < 99! +* *#) *#" / /)>
/5*

/)0
*+5 *>) *>4
2. ))
'!7 3!'- +*
!' ;.' F(G 0* 4+ 40 J
&. .-! 2;(- A ! #5 *5+ **/ */" *)0
*"4 *#) *#" /0# /4
< ( *"5
1 .9- A 9! '!: '- 1 *55 & . ' #/
*5* *5) =!A!9 , #5
. - 3! ?!:- :! /># ! ! 723 9 , *##
.'2 7 (-;'3 *" <.- ( *) *"/ *")
.':!' A.' ( L4 "* "/ /")
") +*
!.9- 723 9 , *)>
1 !.'-7 ( !( 1 /))
1 !9! 1 :' ; .- ,
/)>
 /4#
1 .(( 1 0/ *"5 *>> ?( 4) 4" /0# /4
/" 5 , ' &. .-!( 4" 4+ /0#
(-.99.- '!((!( /"5 /45
(-.99.- &!'!2 7 , 2;,,9! /0# /45
*>" *>> /)# /"5 ;,, /0# L45
!,'!( 2! - .- ''! ;9.' ( 9! 4" 4+
/05 .39! , /0# /45
(!--9! *4/0 /0 - '!! (- - 4"
(-'; - ! ! , A - 9!,- . /)5 /)*
/"# />/
-!'<.9( 3!-A!! ! '!!( ""
//" . !' )/
- E .- 9 D; ' ;' . 2.'?( *4> //+ (-.99.
- /0 .'?A '- 7 )"
.-! .'' <.9( *>
! -;'!( 2;9.- +) +"
= = . )L +* ++ +> +0 +4U +#
=! ( .' !3 ! -;'!( D; -.- ( ,' 2
=!A!9( :!'2 (( 39! *++ *+ 4* 4" */+
= - !' ! '!!( /0/ ! -;'!( .- !( ,
=; ' !. F(G >4 9 - (-'; - /> />*
**" */* *)+ *)# ! -;'! .(-!'( +4 +#
*"" *"0 *"4 *+0 *>0 !,- . ? ?( A - /)
*#" /55 /5* /)*
C!A!9 , **0 *)> *)0 ;(! , 37 /)5 /)*
( -;.- , */" /)> /)0 /)4
=; ' .(- .(-!' /5+ A. -'. (,!''! - */*
=; ' .' ! F(G 0* 4+ #/ */> */0 . . !.
" . #> * ) *! . *4* *)# *"/ *"" *"+ *"4
*40 *#/ *#> /55 /"/ !- A '- ' A.' ))
=!A!9 , (4+ *#/ )+ +* /4*
: (- , 9;2 *#/ !--!' 1 1 *#+ /0# /45
( -;.- , *#/ !<!9 4* *4+ /5"
A ! . '!((! 37 .2! 26'&. '!(- '.- - - */4
#" #0 /0
/ *#" /55 /5* /)> -( !E
- ;( , *)" *)#
. )/ -( '!(- '.- , 0)
!7 *04 *"/
. ( )/ ! & 22 --!! ''! -
!!9 - 9 #" */> *)/ !( ' :- , /0*
*)) *)" *)#U *"" *"4 ! , '!!2.( ( *+
!!9 - 9( 3;9?7 *)/ ! ';9! 37 .(-!' .
1 ,! . , '?1 .( ( /0" .' ! ( *4>
/#5

!( , (-'; - *+ /0 .(-!'F(G .( : A!' -

44 */5 /)+ /"# />/ '!2 <! ,, !'( /*4
/0" /00 /04 2.7 - . - 2 '! - . -A
. ; !2! - , &!'! 7!.'( /*/
2 7 .- /+> 2.7 - ';9! <!' 2 '!
--! . ! !!( /+# - . ! ! /*/
7 .A( /+# 2;(- - (;''! !' & 99.'
!9! - , .(-!' /+" //
/++ 39 .- /** /*/
(;3( ' 3 !23!'( :'!( !( .- .99 2!!- (
/ +4 /+# /*) /*"
(2 ? .- /+4 '!(: ( 3 9 - !( //* //+
- ! ! -;'!( .- />5 />* '!(: ( 39! , ' 3.99 -( ///
A '? /" //)
. ? *+> *+# *>0 '!-;' (.9;-!( 0)
/ # /0/ ' - - .:: - ,, !'(
; ! (; -( /0" /*0 /*4
7'! *54 ' -- ; - &!'!
2 !( /*# //5
' -- ! ! A '? /*"
& ' *4> ' - - '!,;(! . 2 ((
.'! = ;((!99 +/ /*+
S .? 1 ' 2 +" ' - - ';9! /*)
.( .'2( /0) ';9 (;:'!2! /*"
.( 9 - *++ *>0 A '? , //0 /"5
.( 1 1-( 1 /># /0+ .(-!' 9! - *>" *05 /)#
.( !E:! -;'! /0/ .- 3 E ! 2;9.-
.( '7 -!. 37 .-! > >" /0+
(2 +) +" +0 !!- .7( , *#/
.(-!'F(G . ; 3.99 -( 9! & .23!' 0"
//) ;-! ? */* */) *0/
& 99.' - - 3! A ' A ! ;-!( *0/ *0+ /"*
<(- /># ;-!( , '2.- ,
!.- , *#4 /5> *0) /*/ /*) /"*
;-7 - (-.9 (; !(( ' ;-!( '. ! /+
/*4 /*# 4/
!9! - , / */ /" / ;-!( .- ! , (-';
! !'.9 -( , ' F ;' - /"# /+"
.3 ;'G /" /"/ !' <.- ( *)5 *"/
! !'.9 -( , ' F ;' *") /")
!,'!( 2! -G /"/ /"+ !' ( 1 '. ! ,
.( .(- < -! /*" /+ /#
.( ;(- 7 , .''. - !( , - ! ! *0#
//* ' '!(( *++ /0"
 /#
;,,9! ? ?( /0# /45 :! - ! ' ! '!!
;'- & )/ #4 //#
;( - !((! - .9 E54 :! ! *5# //0
;( (! ;9.' **5 :! - ! ! #0 //0
;( .9 :' '.22! /"/ //4 //# /"" '.- '7 A - 2:' <! *44
' ! )"
/"" ' . (- *54 *** **) /""
.79 ' ' *+> ' . (- =!A!9 , *54
!.9 #* E, ' A '? /" 91
& *+5 *>4
(7 3! .< ;' .- 3. D;!- *4# /0) &!'!2 7 , *5*
, '2.- , ;-!( *5/ *)* *)) *"" *"0 *0) *0" /*)*#" *#+ / / /5) /)0
'- .(- ' !' ''! - .(( - ! : '- ! . -!' >#
: ( - .- */# .(- .(-!'1( =!A!9 /5+
'- A '? /" !. ! . A9! ! 723 9 , **0
S ! ;9 .' (7(-!2 , 2 '.9 -7 1
& ''! - , ' >0
0) 0" */0 *)) *)+ Perfect Ceremonies of Craft
*"* *"/ *"+ *"4 /)> Masonry, *4
/)0 /)4 !',! - , -;.9 /0"
39 .- '(- ! '!! */0 !'2. ! -1 ,, !'( **) *+/
*"4 /)> !'2. ! - ,, .9( **) *+/
39 .- ! ! '!! *0*
*)+ *"+ /)0 !'2 (( 39! =!A!9( *++
39 .- ' ! '!! !'2 (( <! ,, !'( 0# 4
*)+ *"* *"/ /)4 *5+ *"# I
,, !'( , - ! ! 0# 45 !'(!<!'. ! -! !
,, !'( :!'2. ! - **) *+/ , /0 /4 /# +> +0
,, !'( :!'2 (( <! 0# 4 !-!' 9?!( See under
*5+ *"# *4* 9?!(
,, !( ! 9.' <. . - *>+ !7- = ))
/)# ?! =.2!( )/
,, !( :' '!(( <! *5+ *5> 9! -7 !239!2 , 4#
. 9;23 ;9! *4+ *#/ *#>
,, .9( :!'2. ! - . ! . .' #+ #> *55 *"4
.' 2!- , ' -
9 <!' ' *4> .::97 #+
:! - ! ! ! '! !:- /+* /+/ /+) '!! #0 #4 //# />
/>/
 "
'! !:- 'F(G *+ /0" 1 ' < 1 < ( - '( *>" *#)
: A!'( , /+* D;.9 , .- ( ;39 -( , '.
, /+* /+/ -!. ( ;9 -!A.' (1 ! I. )#
! "5 "* "/ ") "" "+ ">
< ;.9 />* />/ "0 "4 "# +5 +* +/
A ' ( ;9 3! 9.A /+* M 9 7.9-7 - - ! />+
'!,!'2! - .2 .( ( M;!! - .(- , - ! /"/ />+
*" *+
M; ';2 ! //"
'!(- 99 .2 ++ +> &!'!2 7 , *5/
'!(- 1( ! -;'!( ++ +> *5) *)) *)+ *)4 *""
1 ' :.9 ,, !'( ;:(-. *#+ *#> / ) /5" /)4
1 *# . ? = 8 )/ !
' -! -;.9( *4 /) **# (! !( ,
*/5
(-'; - /00 /04
' !(( .9 ! -'7 - - !
! 9 .- ! , /"
! *+> *+0 *+4
L> /0 /4 /# ) "5 "*
' !(( .9 '!- '!2! - ,' 2 ") "" +* +0 /4*
- ! ! *>> *>0 / # ! 9 .- ' -;.9 /" /0
' ,-. 9!.(;'!1 **> I . /4 )* )4 "* "/ ") +*
/0+ /4*
' '. .(-!' < ( - 37 ! ' . ;'. 7 , *0) *0"
/" /*)
' '!(( ' - !' . 1 ! <!' 1 #4 *5/ *)+
9. 2 3!. 30. *40 *#> /5) /5"
' '!(( <! ,, ! *5+ *5> /)5 /)4 /># /05
**/ **" ! :' !( )0 !
' 2 - 2!- ( , *" ,'!( 2! - 4# *>0
' 2:- 37 !. ( */) . *44 *4# *# /5#
' 2:- - ! ! *>) /*5 /"/ /"+ /0)
/50 .- !( , (-'; -
' 2;9 .- ! , /# /+0 /+4
)5 +) **0 (!.- .- *>0 *>4 (2 ?
' : (.9 , '2( //" .- /"/ /") />)/>4
' : ( &. .-!( !! ! ;9.' ,, !'( , - ! !
, ' .;- /05 0# I+
1 ' <! - ! ! 9 (! !2 <.9 , ,, !'( /*4
-79! 1 #4 ## 1 !: '-1 < 9.'2 4" !: '-(
' < .9 (( (-. - '. !' ;.' 1( #/
.(-!' < ( - 37 /"5 #) #> ## *5)
' < .9 !:;-7 '. =; ' .' ! 1( " "!
.(-!' < ( - 37 /"5
' < .9 '. .(-!'
< ( - 37 /"5 ' < .9
'. . ? *+>
*+# *>* *>0 /5# /0/
 /#)

!(- '.- , -( 0) *"/ *+0 *>0 *4> /5/ /5)

!(- '.- - - **5 =!A!9 , **0 *)> *)0
*/4 *#" /55 /5* /)> ( -;.- , *)>
!(-'. - (723 9 , 4# ! ! ' .' ! +" 0* 0/
(;2 - ! ! /)+ 4> #+ */" */0 */#
*)" *)+ *"+ *"> *+0
.' ( )/ +* .' (
'. ? *+ ( ( 3;( !(( *4+ *40 *#4 /5"
, ' - ! /)* =!A!9 , *4+
/)) : (- , 9;2 *#4
-;.9 -3 4" ';9!( ! .(-!'1( .3
-;.9 (-( !E:!'- /0" (! ! *#4 *##
-;.9( :' -! *4 /) **# A ! . '!((! 37 .2! //0
*/5 ! ' -7 , !. ( '!
33 ( ' 9,'! *+* <!'(! */> *"0
3!'-( = >) !'< ' - !' 4*
; ?!' = +* !!- ( ;9 !<!' 3! , 9 !
;( - )/ +* 0) *)" *)#
;((!99 = +* S A ,, 1 //5
& & , ! ';2 */) ? '!- '! < ( - ,
. 9!' /+ /4 "/ *4)
1 .9;-!(1 < 1 '!!- ( 1 *>/ S !1 ! '!!( /0/
*>) ;' 3( 0) 0" */0 it

.9;-!( - '. ,, !'( *)) *)+ *"* *"/ *"+

*>51 *>* *"4 /)> /)4
1 .< 2! 1 */) *)5 *"/ , < , />#
*"0 ( A ! - ;(! 05 0/
-- )/ +* 9! - (.9;-!( *>/ *>) 2
!.- , '!- '! ! 2 ( '. ? )"
*+# 1 ' 1 '( :,;9 /0)
! '. .' *)) 2- ' +5
*"0 *#+ /5) /)0 2- ' & 9< 99! )" )+
! '!-.'7 >4 4) 4> 44 4# 2 ? .- !,'!( 2! -
#) *5+ *50 **) *+0 *05 /"/ /") />) />4
*45 4> //" !( , (-'; -
!E!2:- ,' 2 (;3( ' :- /+4
*0+ *0> A ! :!'2 (( 39! /"/ /")
=!A!9 , *05 />) />4
( ;9 3! . *0* .9 3 .' *4#
! '!-( : ( - , ' 2 '3!- /"/ /") />+ />4
2; .- 0) *" ;- .(- ' !' ''! -
! ;9.' 2;( : (- .- *"0
!! - .- - ! ! ( :'
:!'97 -79! 1 #0 #4
!!? . 7! ( .99 , 1 4"
! ' !. #+ *5/ *5)
*/* */) */> *)/ *"4
/#"
:.;99 )/ .(-( ( ;9 .' ! ( (-.
:!.? A - 2:' <! , ' I *4# *#5
*44 '. .' ( .
:!! !239!2 , *)> */* */) *>+
D;.'! 4* #+ #> *5/ *)) . ;' (-.99.
*++ /54 //# - *>+
2!- , ' !' ;.' - (! *)) *"0 *#)
.::97 #+ /)0
D;.'!( 9!<!9( . :!':! '!.(;'!' 4/ 44 4# *5>
;9.'( /># **) *+/ *+0 *0+ *04
D;.' - ! ! >0 ># *4* *4> /"/ /0/
P"/0>P *"0
*/4 *)" *)# *"" =!A!9
' A!9, #5 *04
-.3 9 -7 ! , (-'; ;' 2 <!2! -( *//
- +0 79!' (;' - ! *0>
-!: - ! #/ #" #0 +5/ *// 79!'F(G 4* 4> #/ #) #>
*/0 */4 *)) *)# +"/ *5" *5> *+/ *+4 *>>
*"> *"4 *#) *#> /55 //4 /"/ /0/
/ " /)> /)# /05 79!'1( - .(- 4*
-!A.' 40 44 4#
-!A.' . ;(!,;9 ,, !' 44 = +*
-!A.' =!A!9 , 4# '!(( '! .9 . ''! - .-
-!A.' =; ' 40 (-.99.- ( /0/
-!A.' ! ' 40 '- 9!( , />
-!A.' ! 40 - ! /+
;3( ' :- ! '!-.'7 !E -! ! , '!(!<!'
!2:- ,' 2 *0+ *0> . ! /0 /4 /# +> +0 ;3
(- -;-! (! '!-( , . <!'(.9 A '? /"
/)5
; 9 A & )" )+ " 4 8 & ! 9.' ,, !(
>/ /4/ *>+ /)#
;22 ( *00 /*" /"* 8(- ( ? '!- '! *4)
;((!E ;?! , /> "> 8 ( - '( . - ! & .' -7 E
723 9 (2 , (D;.' >0 112.
># 8 ( - '( ! -!' .,-!' - !
! ( :! *+#
8 ( - '( ,' 2 '! &
T A B L E O F K N O C K S , /0# /45 (- -;- ( *>
1 .? ! 1 /5# /") 8 ( - '( :' < ; ? A .(?!' & ))

'!! '. ' :9!( *4 8 */) */4 *>> .

/0+ /54 //4 //#
'!! '!.- -( 4) *4/ ''! - : ( - , /54
2! -.39! /"/ //#
 /#+
F G !. (1 */* */) !(- A '? /"
*/> */0 */# *)) *)" 1 -! W. /# "* "/ ")
*)+U *)# *"/ *""U *"+ "" "0 +*
*"4 157. -! 9 <!( *++
& 1( *>" -! - !( /0"
A ! !. ( !! - -! A. (- .-( /0"
.''7 */* 9( )) 4*
.' ! F(G *4+ *#* *#> /5) 9( )5 )*
)/ ""
. ' 44 4# "+ ">J
'!(: ( 3 9 - !( ;' ! 1 !1 -!A.' 40 ,'!(
2! - *4# *#5 ( 2 723 9 , *)>
(-. , ' - .(-( *4# 1 - ;- !-' 2! - 1 /0/
*# ( ' *+5
;(! , .<!9 37 *4# ( ' 99 .2 *+5
See also under 1=; ' ' :!',! - , -;.9
.' ! 1 . 1 ! ' /0"
.' ! 1 '? 9( !E:9. .-
.''. - //* /"5 , /)0 /"5
.(-!' '!(: ( 39! , ' //* '( :,;9 .(-!' See
!3(-!' ' ; ;(-;( >/ under .(-!'

' -! 37 && 3;'